Draw

Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)
Users Guide
March 2000
DEA503290
For PDS version 06.04.01.**
This document replaces DEA503280.

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or
implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered
commitments by Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Corporation assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this
license.
No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its
affiliated companies.
Trademarks
CLIX, Intergraph, InterPlot, and RIS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. DesignReview, DIALOG, EE Raceway, IGDS,
MicasPlus, ModelDraft, Project Engineer, and SEE are trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. All other brands and product names are
trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyright
2000 Intergraph Corporation
All Rights Reserved
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not
be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.
RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical
Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer
Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001
________________ If You Need Assistance
If You Need Assistance
Intergraph Online
Our web site brings you fast, convenient, up-to-the-minute information about Intergraphs
products, services, and direction. Our web address is:
http://www.intergraph.com
Telephone Support
All Intergraph products are delivered with a 30-day warranty for full coverage of physical
media.
In the United States, call Intergraphs standard support number at 1-800-633-7248 from 7:00
AM to 7:00 PM CST, Monday through Friday, except holidays.
If you are outside of the United States, please call your local Intergraph office. The most up-
to-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at
http://www.intergraph.com.
Please have the following information available when you call:
The products serial number. This can be found on the license agreement or by using
the About command in the product.
Your name and telephone number.
The products name.
Your CPIN number and service number.
A brief description of the problem.
3
________________
Intergraph Directory
The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. If you
are outside the United States, please call your local Intergraph office.
Intergraph General Information

U.S. 1-800-345-4856
Canada 1-800-461-5297
All countries 1-256-730-2000
Customer Response Center (U.S. Only)

Customer Support 1-800-633-7248
U.S. Customer Care Center 1-888-779-3824
FAX 1-800-239-2972
Training Registration (U.S. Only)

1-800-240-3000
Regional Sales Information (U.S. Only)

1-800-240-1000
Mailing Address
Intergraph Corporation
Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001
U.S.A.
You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph.com.
4
________________ Educational Media Contacts
Educational Media Contacts

We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other
educational media. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation
or where you think more information is needed, let us know. You can reach us by:
Mail Intergraph Corporation

Manager, PBS Documentation
GD3006
Huntsville, AL 35894-0001
FAX PBS Documentation

1-256-730-3300
Electronic Mail pds_doc@metron.b30.ingr.com
5
________________
6
________________ Table of Contents
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ 3
Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. 4
Educational Media Contacts .......................................................................................... 5
General Conventions .................................................................................................................... 15
Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... 16

Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 17
1. Welcome to Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) ................................................................................. 19
Drawing Manager Introduction .................................................................................................... 21
2. Overview of Drawing Manager .................................................................................................... 23
2.1 Before Using Drawing Manager ......................................................................................... 25

2.2 Drawing Manager Theory of Operation .............................................................................. 26
2.2.1 Drawings ................................................................................................................. 27

2.2.2 Drawing Views ........................................................................................................ 28
2.2.3 Drawing Borders ..................................................................................................... 29
2.2.4 Drawing Plot Size ................................................................................................... 31
2.2.5 Seed Files ................................................................................................................ 33
2.2.6 Drawing Categories ................................................................................................. 35
2.2.7 Cells ........................................................................................................................ 37
2.2.8 Database Tables ...................................................................................................... 38
2.2.9 Standard Notes / Code Lists .................................................................................... 41
2.2.10 Labels .................................................................................................................... 41
2.2.11 Drawing Managers Output ................................................................................... 42
2.2.12 Customizing Drawing Manager ............................................................................ 43
2.2.12.1 Automatic Title Block Generation ....................................................... 44

2.2.12.2 The ASCII Text Node Definition File ................................................. 46
2.2.12.3 Nominal Pipe Diameter Value ............................................................. 48
2.2.12.4 Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters ..................................... 49
3. Drawing Management .................................................................................................................. 51
3.1 Using the Drawing Management Commands ..................................................................... 53
4. Drawing Manager ......................................................................................................................... 55
4.1 Create Options ..................................................................................................................... 57
7
________________
Drawing Manager Users Guide - March 2000
4.1.1 Create Drawing ....................................................................................................... 59

4.1.2 Create Drawing from ASCII File ............................................................................ 62
4.1.3 Copy Drawing ......................................................................................................... 67
4.1.3.1 Drawing View Data .................................................................................. 70
4.1.4 Create Drawing View .............................................................................................. 72
4.1.4.1 Named Item .............................................................................................. 76
4.1.4.1.1 Named Item by Model ........................................................... 78

4.1.4.1.2 Named Item by Project ........................................................... 80
4.1.4.2 Saved View .............................................................................................. 82

4.1.4.3 Define View Location .............................................................................. 83
4.2 Copy Drawing View ........................................................................................................... 85

4.3 Create Composite Drawing View ....................................................................................... 88
4.3.1 Define Views for Composite Drawing View .......................................................... 92
4.3.1.1 Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View .............................. 94
4.3.2 Create Composite Drawing Views Example ........................................................... 95
4.4 Revise Options .................................................................................................................... 102
4.4.1 Revise Drawing ....................................................................................................... 104

4.4.2 Revise Drawing View ............................................................................................. 106
4.4.2.1 Revise Drawing View Data ...................................................................... 108

4.4.2.2 Revise Composite Drawing View Data ................................................... 111
4.4.2.2.1 Redefine Individual Views ..................................................... 113
4.4.2.3 Revise Orientation .................................................................................... 115

4.4.2.4 Reference Models ..................................................................................... 117
4.4.2.4.1 Copy From Active Drawing ................................................... 119

4.4.2.4.2 Copy From Another Drawing ................................................ 121
4.4.2.4.3 Attach Model .......................................................................... 124
4.4.2.4.4 Detach Model ......................................................................... 126
4.4.2.4.5 Auto Attach/Verify ................................................................. 127
4.5 Delete Options ..................................................................................................................... 130
4.5.1 Delete Drawing ....................................................................................................... 131

4.5.2 Delete Drawing View .............................................................................................. 132
8
4.6 Report - Drawing Management Data .................................................................................. 134

4.7 Report Models Form ........................................................................................................... 137
4.7.1 Using the Report Commands .................................................................................. 139
4.8 Report Format Form ............................................................................................................ 141
4.8.1 Format Creation/Revision Form ............................................................................. 143

4.8.2 Format Deletion Form ............................................................................................. 145
4.9 Discrimination Data Form ................................................................................................... 147
4.9.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form ........................................................................ 149

4.9.2 Discrimination Data Revision Form ....................................................................... 151
4.9.2.1 Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form ................................................... 153

4.9.2.2 Search Criteria - Component Form .......................................................... 157
4.9.3 Discrimination Data Deletion Form ........................................................................ 162
4.10 Search Criteria Data Form ................................................................................................ 164
4.10.1 Search Criteria Data Creation Form .................................................................... 166

4.10.2 Search Criteria Data Revision Form ................................................................... 169
4.10.3 Search Criteria Deletion Form ............................................................................ 171
4.11 Report Form ...................................................................................................................... 173
4.11.1 Report Creation Form ......................................................................................... 175

4.11.2 Revise Report Form ............................................................................................ 178
4.11.3 Report Deletion Form ......................................................................................... 181
4.11.4 Report Approval Form ........................................................................................ 183
4.11.4.1 Approval/Revision Interface Form .................................................... 184
4.11.5 Report Multiple Submit Form ............................................................................. 186
4.12 Report Management Defaults Form .................................................................................. 188

4.13 Approve Drawing .............................................................................................................. 190
5. Graphics Environment ................................................................................................................. 193
5.1 Drawing ............................................................................................................................... 194

5.2 View .................................................................................................................................... 195
5.2.1 View Commands ..................................................................................................... 198
Viewing Options ................................................................................................. 199

5.2.1.1 Drawing Categories .............................................................................. 201
9
________________
5.2.1.1.1 Review/Revise Category .................................................... 202

5.2.1.1.2 Add Category ..................................................................... 203
5.2.1.1.3 Remove Category ............................................................... 204
5.2.2 View, More Commands .......................................................................................... 205

5.2.3 Viewing Direction ................................................................................................... 207
5.2.4 View Depth ............................................................................................................. 208
5.3 File ...................................................................................................................................... 209
5.3.1 Plot .......................................................................................................................... 210

5.3.2 File Design .............................................................................................................. 212
5.3.3 Exit .......................................................................................................................... 213
5.3.4 Active Options ........................................................................................................ 214
5.3.5 Select Another Drawing .......................................................................................... 219
5.4 Element ............................................................................................................................... 220

5.5 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 221
5.6 User ..................................................................................................................................... 223
6. Composing Drawings ................................................................................................................... 225
6.1 Create Drawing View .......................................................................................................... 226
6.1.1 Named Item ............................................................................................................. 230
6.1.1.1 Named Item by Model ............................................................................. 232

6.1.1.2 Named Item by Project ............................................................................. 234
6.1.2 Saved View ............................................................................................................. 236

6.1.3 Define View Location ............................................................................................. 237
6.2 Create Composite View ...................................................................................................... 239
6.2.1 Define Views for Composite Drawing View .......................................................... 242

6.2.2 Define Composite Drawing With Saved View ....................................................... 244
6.2.3 Create Composite Drawing Views Example ........................................................... 245
6.3 Copy Drawing View ........................................................................................................... 251

6.4 Create Section View ............................................................................................................ 254
6.5 Create Composite Plan View .............................................................................................. 257
6.6 Compose Drawing ............................................................................................................... 261
6.7 Compose Drawing View ..................................................................................................... 263
6.7.1 Reference Models .................................................................................................... 267
6.7.1.1 Copy Active Drawing .............................................................................. 269

6.7.1.2 Copy Another Drawing ............................................................................ 271
6.7.1.3 Attach Model ............................................................................................ 273
6.7.1.4 Automatic Attach & Verify ...................................................................... 275
10
6.7.1.5 Detach Model ........................................................................................... 277

6.7.1.6 Reference Model Categories .................................................................... 278
6.7.1.6.1 Review/Revise ........................................................................ 280

6.7.1.6.2 Add Category ......................................................................... 281
6.7.1.6.3 Remove Category ................................................................... 282
6.7.2 Delete Drawing View .............................................................................................. 283

6.7.3 Align Drawing View ............................................................................................... 284
6.7.4 Revise View Data .................................................................................................... 286
6.7.5 Revise Orientation ................................................................................................... 288
6.7.6 Unassigned Views ................................................................................................... 290
7. Annotating Drawings ................................................................................................................... 291
7.1 Mass Annotation ................................................................................................................. 293

7.2 Place Labels ........................................................................................................................ 302
7.3 Equipment Centerlines ........................................................................................................ 313
7.4 Update Labels ...................................................................................................................... 319
7.4.1 Revise Text .............................................................................................................. 324

7.4.2 Edit Text .................................................................................................................. 325
7.5 Revision Markers ................................................................................................................ 326

7.6 Display Report .................................................................................................................... 328
7.7 Place Cell ............................................................................................................................ 331
7.8 Place Text and Line ............................................................................................................. 333
7.9 Overlay Drawing ................................................................................................................. 336
7.10 Review Attribute ............................................................................................................... 338
7.11 Measure Distance .............................................................................................................. 339
7.12 Drawing Annotation Symbology ...................................................................................... 341
7.13 Name Label ....................................................................................................................... 344
7.14 Coordinate Label ............................................................................................................... 356
7.15 Automatic Labels .............................................................................................................. 367
7.15.1 Label Fence Contents .......................................................................................... 370

7.15.2 Search Criteria - Component Form ..................................................................... 371
8. Update Annotation Labels ............................................................................................................ 377
9. Vector Hidden Line Manager ....................................................................................................... 379
9.1 Viewing Hidden Line Graphics .......................................................................................... 388

9.2 Symbology Based VHL Drawings ...................................................................................... 391
9.2.1 Drawing Type and Symbology Map ....................................................................... 393
9.2.1.1 Drawing Type Map Association .............................................................. 394

9.2.1.2 Search Criteria Symbology Map .............................................................. 395
11
________________
9.2.1.2.1 EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria ......................................... 396

9.2.1.2.2 FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria ................................. 399
10. Search Criteria for VHL ............................................................................................................. 401
10.1 Search Criteria Data Creation Form ................................................................................ 403

10.2 Search Criteria Data Revision Form ............................................................................... 406
10.3 Search Criteria Deletion Form ........................................................................................ 408
11. Plot Manager .............................................................................................................................. 411
11.1 Plot Drawing ................................................................................................................... 412
11.1.1 Drawing Categories ........................................................................................... 416

11.1.2 Reference Models .............................................................................................. 417
12. Project Planner ........................................................................................................................... 421
12.1 Project Planner Command Menu .................................................................................... 422
12.1.1 PlotPlan ............................................................................................................. 423
12.1.1.1 Drawing Views ................................................................................. 424
12.1.1.1.1 Delete Unassigned View .............................................. 427

12.1.1.1.2 Update Views ............................................................... 429
12.1.1.1.3 Select Model ................................................................. 430
12.1.1.1.4 Named Item .................................................................. 431
12.1.1.1.5 Graphic Symbology ..................................................... 433
12.1.1.2 Viewing Options .............................................................................. 435
12.1.1.2.1 Set View Orientation .................................................... 436

12.1.1.2.2 Update Window ........................................................... 437
12.1.1.2.3 Rotate About View ....................................................... 438
12.1.1.2.4 Match Planar Element .................................................. 439
12.1.1.2.5 Rotation 3 Points .......................................................... 440
12.1.1.2.6 Dialog View Rotation .................................................. 441
12.1.1.2.7 Color Shading .............................................................. 442
12.1.1.2.8 Camera View ................................................................ 445
12.1.1.2.9 Views ............................................................................ 447
12.1.1.2.10 Level Symbology On ................................................. 448
12.1.1.2.11 Level Symbology Off ................................................. 449
12.1.1.2.12 Form Left/Right Screen .............................................. 450
12.1.1.3 Exit ................................................................................................... 451
12.1.2 View .................................................................................................................. 452

12.1.3 File .................................................................................................................... 453
12
12.1.3.1 File Design ....................................................................................... 454

12.1.3.2 Exit ................................................................................................... 455
13. Project Setup .............................................................................................................................. 457
13.1 Drawing Type .................................................................................................................. 461

13.2 Reference Categories ....................................................................................................... 463
13.3 Copy Drawing Type ........................................................................................................ 466
13.4 Remove Reference .......................................................................................................... 468
13.5 Plotting Categories .......................................................................................................... 469
13.6 Label Filter ...................................................................................................................... 470
14. Plot Setup Manager .................................................................................................................... 471
14.1 Create I/Plot Parameter File ............................................................................................ 473

14.2 Revise I/Plot Parameter File ............................................................................................ 475
14.3 Delete I/Plot Parameter File ............................................................................................ 477
Appendix A: Error Messages .......................................................................................................... 479
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 481
Index .................................................................................................................................................... 489
13
________________
14
General Conventions
This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain
words or phrases. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to
scan the document for key concepts or commands. Symbols help abbreviate and identify
commonly used words, phrases, or groups of related information.
Typefaces
Italic Indicates a system response, which is an explanation of what the software is
doing. For example,
The text is placed in the viewing plane.
Bold Indicates a command name, parameter name, or dialog box title. Command
paths are shown using an arrow between command names. For example,
Choose File > Open to load a new file.
Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message, which requires an action be taken by
the user. For example,
Select first segment of alignment
Bold Typewriter
Indicates what you should literally type in. For example,
Key in original.dat to load the ASCII file.
Normal Typewriter
Indicates an actual file or directory name. For example,
The ASCII report is stored in the layout.rpt file.
15
________________
Symbols
This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special
information:
<C> Command button

<D> Data button (usually the left mouse button)
<R> Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button)
<T> Tentative button (usually the center mouse button)
Note Important supplemental information.
Warning Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed.
Technical tip or information provides information on what the software is

doing or how it processes information.
Map or path shows you how to get to a specific command or form.
More information indicates there is additional or related information.
Need a hint used with activities and labs, provides a tip or hint for doing the
exercises.
Keyboard Conventions
The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and
describes how to use them in combination. You can make some menu selections through the
use of keyboard accelerators, which map menu selections to key combinations.
ALT Alternate key

CTRL Control key
DEL Delete key
ENTER Enter key
ESC Escape key
CTRL+z To hold down the Control key and press Z.

ESC,k To press the Escape key, then K.
16
Terminology
Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an
action. For example,
Click Apply to save the changes.
Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking

it with your cursor. Selecting does not initiate an action. After
selecting an item, you click the action you want to affect the item. For
example,
Select the file original.dat from the list box, then click Delete to
remove it from the directory.
In addition, you would select items to define parameters, such as

selecting toggle buttons. This also applies to selecting graphic
elements from the design file. For example,
Select the line string to define the graphic template.
Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design

file. If you are using the CLIX operating system, you tentative-select
by double-clicking with a mouse or pressing <T> on a hand-held
cursor. If you are using the Windows NT operating system, you
tentative-select by pressing a left-button, right-button chord.
Double-click To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held

cursor button twice in rapid succession. This term implies that you are
clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action.
For example,
Double-click on the file original.dat to load it into the new surface.
Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or
hand-held cursor.
Type To key a character string into a text box.
Key in To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the
default action.
In a dialog box, pressing TAB after keying in data will

enter the data and move the cursor to the next field.
17
________________
18
________________ Welcome to Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)
1. Welcome to Drawing Manager

(PD_Draw)
1.Overview
Designers use the Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) product to create and/or revise
orthographic production drawings. PD_Draw can be used with other PDS 3D products to
place annotation labels identifying intelligent items and model coordinates, to plot the
drawings, and to produce reports for drawings and model data.
About this users guide

The Drawing Manager is organized by subject and commands on the Drawing Manager
interface and graphics environment. It is divided into several chapters.
Chapter 1 Provides an overview of the Drawing Manager. It describes general

information, terms, and work flow.
Chapter 2 Describes the Drawing Manager theory of operation, and describes a few
customization methods.
Chapter 3 Describes the Drawing Management form and options used to create and
manipulate drawings and drawing views.
Chapter 4 Describes the non-graphics Drawing Manager environment.
Chapter 5 Describes the interactive graphics environment for Drawing Manager.
Chapter 6 Describes the Drawing Composition options from the Drawing pull-down
menu.
Chapter 7 Describes the Drawing Annotation options from the Drawing pull-down
menu.
Chapter 8 Describes the Update Annotation Labels command.
Chapter 9 Describes the Vector Hidden Line Manager and its use.
Chapter 10 Describes the Search Criteria used in the creation of symbology based
VHL drawings.
Chapter 11 Describes the PDS-specific plotting interface for drawings external to the
graphics environment.
Chapter 12 Describes the Project Planner command, creating a Key Plan model file
for the project, and creating unassigned drawing views.
19
________________
Chapter 13 Describes how to use the Project Setup command options to set defaults
for all drawings in a project. These defaults are utilized at the time each drawing is
created.
Chapter 14 Describes the option that specifies the name, description, and the full file
specifications for an I/Plot Parameter file.
20
________________ Drawing Manager Introduction
Drawing Manager Introduction
1.Overview
The 3D PDS products use interactive graphics and database management techniques to
integrate the engineering and design/drafting execution of plant design.
The Drawing Manager is used to create and revise orthographic production drawings. It can
be used by any of the 3D disciplines within PDS for drawing management.
Drawing Manager Features

The Drawing Manager can be used to:
Create drawings of models for any of the PDS 3D disciplines, along with key plan
drawings.
Create multiple drawing views for a given drawing.
Revise definition information for existing drawings or drawing views.
Delete drawings and drawing views.
Report on drawing information in the Project Control Database.
Report on model data in a specified drawing and drawing view(s).
Place drawing views graphically within a drawing border.
Revise drawing view characteristics, including clipping volume, orientation, reference

file attachments, and display categories.
Place annotation labels on a drawing to identify intelligent items and model

coordinates.
Create hidden-line-removed model graphics.
Plot a drawing or set of drawings.
Create a key plan model for the project.
21
________________
22
________________ Overview of Drawing Manager
2. Overview of Drawing Manager

The 3D PDS products use interactive graphics and database management techniques to
integrate the engineering and design/drafting execution of plant design.
Since a process plant can be extremely large, PDS uses the following organization to break
the plant into smaller units that can be handled more easily.
A Project is a convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant.
The project is the fundamental structure for working in PDS. The project constitutes the entire
volume of the project.
Operation
2.Theory of
A Design Area represents a specified volume of the project for a specific discipline.
A model is a 3D Microstation file that has a defined discipline and is located within the
volume of the project.
Besides the terms above, which are used in most PDS applications, the Drawing Manager
uses the following terms.
A drawing is a sheet or a plot used to describe the design of a model design volume (work
area). Many drawings can be created from one model to completely document a design
volume. A drawing can contain more than one drawing view of a model or models.
A drawing view is a view of a model or models. Each drawing view within a drawing can
have a different scale and each label within a drawing can have a different character size.
You can create a drawing during any stage of the design process. It consists of the reference
model attachments for the model graphics used in the drawing and the graphics for the
drawing itself. The model graphics reside in the design file for that model. These model
graphics are attached to the drawing as reference files through the use of drawing views.
Because the model graphics are reference file attachments, the graphics in the drawings
automatically change as the design changes in the model. In other words, the drawing view
graphics are always up-to-date and synchronized with the model.
Unlike model graphics, labels, dimensions, and vector hidden-line (VHL) graphics are
"snapshots" of the model. Labels can be updated with the Update Labels commands;
dimensions must be revised by the user; and VHL graphics must be re-generated.
The Project Administrator controls the creation and modification of PDS 3D projects. Each
project consists of a Project Control Database, Project Design Database, piping and equipment
models, reference models (structural, HVAC, electrical raceway, and user-defined
disciplines), a set of drawings, and a collection of reference data. The reference data may be
specific to one project or shared by multiple projects.
A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator
before you can use them in any of the other PDS 3D modules. Refer to the Project
Administrator Reference Guide for more information on setting up a project.
23
________________
The Drawing Manager is used to create and revise, plot, and report on orthographic
production drawings of 3D PDS models.
24
________________ Before Using Drawing Manager
2.1 Before Using Drawing Manager

Drawing Manager uses PDS model files for reference when creating orthographic drawings.
This means that Drawing Manager cannot perform its job until a project has been defined and
at least one model file exists.
Project Setup
A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator
before you can use the Drawing Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference
Operation
2.Theory of
Guide for information on
Loading PDS 3D products.
Editing the control script to identify the location of the project data.
Setting up a project and creating the associated database schemas.
Accessing the PDS 3D products remotely using NFS.
Model Files
A set of model files for the project must be defined before you can use the Drawing
Manager.
Refer to the following documents for information on creating and manipulating PDS 3D
Models.
Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide
PDS Equipment Modeling Reference Guide
MicasPlus ModelDraft Reference Guide
PE HVAC Modeling Reference Guide
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide
25
________________
2.2 Drawing Manager Theory of

Operation
This section should familiarize you with the general theory behind how the Drawing Manager
module works, and how it can be customized for suiting your needs. The following topics
will be discussed:
Drawings
Drawing Views
Drawing Borders
Drawing Plot Size
Seed Files
Drawing Categories
Cells
Tables
Standard Notes / Code Lists
Labels
Drawing Managers Output
Customizing Drawing Manager
26
________________ Drawings
2.2.1 Drawings
A drawing file does not consist of model graphics; a drawing contains intelligent labels,
MicroStation dimensioning, title block text, VHL graphics, and user text and graphics. The
model graphics are attached as reference files, and are not part of the actual drawing file.
Think of a drawing as a pane of glass (drawing file) under which you can see multiple
overlapping, transparent images (reference files) that correspond to user-defined sections of
various model files. When you annotate a drawing, you are merely placing information on the
pane of glass - not on the images themselves.
The illustration below includes a drawing that references a border file and four other attached
Operation
2.Theory of
reference model files: equipment, structural, HVAC, and electrical raceway models.
All drawings have a plot size value and can have various levels or categories displayed within
them. Each drawing view can be assigned a scale value.
27
________________
2.2.2 Drawing Views

A drawing view is a "window" into the model with the following characteristics:
User-specified scale. (For example, 3/8" = 1.)
User-specified viewing direction. (For example, Looking North.)
User-specified viewing volume. (For example, user-defined high and low Easting,
Northing, and Elevation values, or using the volume of a previously-defined view.)
User-specification of referenced models. (For example, one or more piping model files,
one or more equipment model files, etc.)
A drawing view can be limited to display only specific portions of the model, or the entire
model (or a part of it) shown from a different perspective, or the entire model (or a part of it)
displayed at a different scale for detail. Views help to document the drawing by allowing the
user to display several orientations or emphasize specific portions of the model. For more
information about drawing views, refer to Composing Drawings, page 225.
Changes in any referenced model files are automatically reflected in the

drawing view.
28
________________ Drawing Borders
2.2.3 Drawing Borders

Borders are user-created MicroStation design files. For an Imperial units project where the
smallest scale to be shown on any drawing is 1/8" = 1, border files should be created with
Master Units =1, Sub Units=12, Positional Units = 195072, and should be drawn in a 1:1
scale. For example, cutting lines of an A size plot should be 8 1/2 inches and 11 inches long,
while the actual drawing border lines should be offset from the cutting lines by whatever
distance you want.
A sample A-size border design is shown below:
Operation
2.Theory of
When creating your border files, be sure to obey the drawing type conventions discussed in
Before Using Drawing Manager, page 25. You must follow the conventions established by
Standard Note 1202 and Standard Note 2000 for drawing size and type.
Do not use any Microstation predefined shapes (square, polygon, etc.) to create the
border or the cutting lines; instead, use lines or line strings. The system hidden line
software (Vector Hidden Line) interprets shapes as surfaces, and may give
upredictable results in the finished drawing such as clipped or missing graphics.
Border files may contain specific locations for placing text (text nodes). This
feature allows for automatic placement of title block information, among other
uses. For more information about text nodes, refer to the MicroStation
documentation. For more information about automatic title block generation,
refer to Automatic Title Block Generation, page 44.
The Drawing Manager uses the following guidelines to determine which drawing border to
attach.
29
________________
The directory and network address for the drawing border is defined in the RDB
Management Data with the Reference Data Manager. This setting is stored in the
Project Control Database for access by the Drawing Manager.
The file specifications for the drawing borders are determined by the following naming
convention.
dwgbrd_<drawing_type>.<drawing_size>
The drawing_type is the standard note number in Standard Note Type 2000 for drawing
types.
The drawing_size is the text for the standard note value corresponding to the drawing
size in the Standard Note Type 1202.
For example, the drawing border name for an A size Equipment Arrangement drawing
is dwgbrd_661.a.
The center of the border is always 0 for the x, y, and z coordinates.
30
________________ Drawing Plot Size
2.2.4 Drawing Plot Size

The Draw Plot Size Table is located in the drawplotsize file and is copied from the PD_Shell
delivery directory at the time a project is created. This file specifies the view locations within
a drawing on a specific media size. It contains the drawing size standard note, plotting media
size, the four margins that define view location, and the standard engineering notation for the
plotting media size. For more information about defining view locations, refer to
Define View Location, page 83 . An example of a drawplotsize file and definitions of each
field follows:
!Drawing Plot Size Table

!
Operation
2.Theory of
!Drawing Size Cutting Edge Margins from Cutting Edge (Drawing Size)
!Std Note Size X-l Y-t X-r Y-b
!
1 8.5"x11" 0.8125" 0.625" 2.125" 0.625 (A)
2 11"x17" 1" 0.6875" 3" 0.6875" (B)
3 17"x22" 1.1875" 0.75" 3.75" 0.75" (C)
4 24"x36" 1.375" 0.8125" 5.4375" 0.8125" (D)
5 34"x44" 1.5625" 0.875" 6.875" 0.875" (E)
6 28"x40" 1.625" 0.9375" 5.625" 0.9375" (F)
101 840mmx1189mm 56mm 35mm 198mm 35mm (A0)
102 595mmx840mm 47mm 30mm 193mm 30mm (A1)
103 420mmx595mm 38mm 27mm 190mm 27mm (A2)
104 297mmx420mm 33mm 25mm 155mm 72mm (A3)
105 210mmx297mm 28mm 24mm 65mm 24mm (A4)
Drawing Size Std Note This is the standard note, referenced from the Standard Note
Type 1202, for the drawing size selected.
Cutting Edge Size This reflects the actual size of the cutting edge which is the
media cutting edge dimensions around the border that is associated with the drawing
size. If plot limits of the output device are less than cutting edge dimensions, Drawing
Manager scales the plot down to fit within the plotting limits.
If the plot limits are greater than cutting edge dimensions, no fit is performed and the
plot border including cutting lines is generated. Excess paper can be trimmed and the
true A, B, C, D, E, F, or A0, A1, A2, A3, or A4 size drawing sheet remains.
If plot limits are equal to the drawplotsize dimensions, no fit is performed, the plot is
generated and no cutting lines appear because they are coincident with the edges of the
plot medium.
31
________________
Margins from Cutting Edge
X-l This defines the horizontal distance from the left cutting edge for composition.
(This value corresponds with X1 as described in Define View Location.)
X-r This defines the horizontal distance from the right cutting edge for composition.
(This value corresponds with X2 as described in Define View Location.)
Y-t This defines the vertical distance from the top cutting edge for composition.
(This value corresponds with Y1 as described in Define View Location.)
Y-b This defines the vertical distance from the bottom cutting edge for composition.
(This value corresponds with Y2 as described in Define View Location.)
Drawing Size This is the standard note text for the drawing size.
32
________________ Seed Files
2.2.5 Seed Files

Seed files control the default "styles" of drawings produced by Drawing Manager. All
drawings based on the same seed file will have the same types of line weights, text heights,
colors, units of measurement, orientation values, default plot categories, etc.
The Project Seed File / Alternate Seed File option on the Project Setup form specifies
whether the default project drawing seed file or an alternate drawing seed file is used for a
specific drawing type. The default project drawing seed file, drwsdz.dgn, is stored in the
project directory and is used as the seed file for all drawing types, unless an alternate is
specified by drawing type.
Operation
2.Theory of
If the Project Seed File option is specified, all subsequent drawings created will have their
line weights, line types, text options, etc. defined by one seed file data-set. For example,
Equipment Drawings will have exactly the same graphic symbology and dimensioning
attributes as Structural Drawings, Piping Drawings, etc. For more information about the
project and alternate seed files, refer to Project Setup, page 457.
You can display dimensions as whole millimeters if you choose to do so.

During Project Setup, Project Administrator allows revision of working units
used in creating a project. Master units in a Metric project are meters, with
subunits being millimeters; however, the project administrator can designate
master units to be millimeters, with subunits set also to millimeters. This will
ensure that dimensions will be read as millimeters, not meters.
For more information about this topic, refer to Displaying Dimensions in

Whole Millimeters, page 49.
For more information about working units, refer to Project Administrator

(PD_Project).
If you want different drawing types to have unique graphic symbology (line weights, types,
etc.), text features (fonts, sizes, etc.) and dimensioning attributes (FT, IN versus , "), then the
alternate seed file option should be used. Each drawing type may have its own unique seed
data which will be applied to all subsequently created drawings of that type. The alternate
seed file is named draw_seed.<drawing type> and is stored in the project directory. You do
not have to define an alternate seed file for every drawing type, only for those you intend to
use.
The <drawing type> code listed value is defined in the Standard Note Library
CL2000. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more
information.
For example, if Equipment Drawings are to use the alternate seed file, this option would
create a file called draw_seed.3 in the project directory (if 3 is the Code List 2000 value
assigned to the equipment drawing type).
Once created, the seed data can be customized through the Project Data Manager option of
Project Administrator by selecting Seed, Revise Drawing Data, and the drawing type to be
customized. Only those drawing types which have been defined as Alternate Seed File types
are listed. Project Seedfile is also listed for those drawing types which do not have an
alternate. Once selected, the following 6 data types may be altered:
33
________________
Drawing Category Data
Graphic Symbology Data
Label Character Sizes
Drawing Annotation Options
Reference Database File Specifications
Hidden Line Symbology Data
If drawings have already been created before alternate seed data has been
defined, the new data may be updated in the existing drawings with the
Propagate function in the Project Data Manager. (Please note that propagate
only works on: drawing annotation symbology, vector hidden line graphics
symbology, character sizes for labels, and drawing graphic symbology data.)
The same is true if changes are made throughout the life of the project that
need to be applied to existing drawing files.
34
________________ Drawing Categories
2.2.6 Drawing Categories

A category is an "alias" for the Microstation drawing level (1-63) in the drawing file; the
category is a way of assigning a meaningful, name to a specific level so that the designer does
not have to refer to the various drawing levels by number.
When a project is created, the Project Administrator copies the default drawing category
names to the project directory. The name of the copied file is drwcats.txt. You can edit this
file to change the names that are displayed for drawing categories.
Although you can modify the drawing category names, the meaning of a
specific category will not be altered by this change.
Operation
2.Theory of
Drawing View Specific Labels ;Category 4
Drawing View Identification Labels ;Category 5
Coordinate Labels ;Category 7
Dimensioning ;Category 9
Revision Triangles and Revision Clouds ;Category 10
Hold Clouds ;Category 11
Reports ;Category 8
Miscellaneous Drawing Graphics ;Category 3
Non-Plotted Drawing Graphics ;Category 12
VHL Plot Date ;Category 2
Matchlines By System ;Category 1
Title Block Data ;Category 6
Battery Limits ;Category 36
Matchlines By User ;Category 37
Centerlines ;Category 38
Dumb Details ;Category 39
Leader Lines for Dumb Details ;Category 40
Extension Lines for Dumb Details ;Category 41
Dimensions for Dumb Details ;Category 42
Coordinates for Dumb Details ;Category 43
Like Line No Labels ;Category 44
Like Equipment No Labels ;Category 45
User-defined drawing annotation category 11 ;Category 46
Each drawing type can also have an alternate list of category names. The name of the
alternate category list is dwg_text_<drawing type>, and it is stored in the project directory.
You do not have to define an alternate drawing type file for every drawing type, although this
is an option.
The <drawing type> code listed value is defined in the Standard Note Library
CL2000. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more
information.
35
________________
For example, if Equipment Drawings are to use an alternate drawing category list, a file called
dwg_text_3 must exist in the project directory (if 3 is the Code List 2000 value assigned to the
equipment drawing type). This file must be created externally using a text editor. First, the
contents of the drwcats.txt file should be copied into the appropriately-named alternate
drawing category file. Then, you can edit this file to change the names that are displayed for
drawing categories.
If an alternate drawing category file does not exist in the project directory, or it has been
named incorrectly, the default project category list will be used.
36
________________ Cells
2.2.7 Cells
Cells are used to repeatedly place "dumb" graphics (not associated with the project control
database) within drawings. Cells are created within MicroStation, and are used to place
frequently-used objects like the North arrow and the company logo into the drawing. Another
example of a cell is an eye-wash station; placing a cell representation of an eye-wash station
would keep the desginer from drawing a new one each time one is placed in the drawing.
PDS delivers some cells for drawing annotation, found in the cell library
\win32app\ingr\pdshell\cell\drawing.cel. This cell library is copied to the project directory by
the Project Administrator as a part of project creation. The drawing.cel library in the project
directory must be used for any cells which you intend to use for drawing annotation. The
Operation
2.Theory of
Drawing Manager attaches this cell library each time you select a drawing for the purpose of
drawing annotation, unless that drawing type has been set to use an alternate cell library.
When the Place Cell command is used, the system prompts you to select the appropriate cell
from a list of cell descriptions. This list of descriptions is found in the file called
dwg_cell_list. This file contains two columns; column one is for the cell name, and column
two is for the description. The descriptions may be edited to suit your needs, but do not
change the cell names.
Each drawing type may use an alternate drawing cell library. The library name and its
network address are specified on the Project Setup form. You must specify the file names
for any alternate cell libraries to be used; however, the cell description list for each alternate
cell library will be named dwg_cell.<drawing type>, and they are stored in the project
directory. If a cell description list file an alternate cell library does not exist, the system will
use the default, dwg_cell_list.
The cell description list file follows this format:
FLOARR FLOW ARROW CELL

NAR1 PLANT NORTH ARROW
NAR2 N. ARROW UP RIGHT
NAR3 N. ARROW UP LEFT
NAR4 N. ARROW DOWN LEFT
NAR5 N. ARROW DOWN RIGHT
cl center line
gradea grade at angle
gradeh grade horizontal
For more information about cells, refer to Place Cell, page 331, or refer to the MicroStation
documentation.
37
________________
2.2.8 Database Tables

PDS stores information about the project and its models, drawings, drawing views, composite
views, piping, equipment, components, etc. in a series of related database tables. Each time a
new model is created, or a new piping component or piece of equipment is placed, or a new
view is created, a new record is placed in the appropriate table(s).
This section includes and describes the tables from the Project Control Database Definition
that are affected by the drawing process. These tables are stored in a file called project.ddl.
You may modify only the column name fields in the project.ddl file; do not edit any
other fields in the database definitions.
The project.ddl file classifies these tables according to the project hierarchy (model
management data, then drawing management data). Each level of the project hierarchy has
further divisions (model management data has tables for engineering discipline data, design
area data, and model data).
The rest of this section provides the name and description of each table affected by the
drawing process.
For more detailed information about the Project Control Database, the
project.ddl file, and table information, refer to the Project Administrator
(PD_Project) Reference Guide.
MODEL MANAGEMENT DATA
Engineering Discipline Data

table number = 111, (pdtable_111)
PDS allows up to 10 distinct disciplines per project. When a new discipline is added to the
project, a new record is added to this table. The record includes such items as a unique index
number for that discipline (discipline_indx_no), and a 20-character discipline name
(discipline_name).
Design Area Data

table number = 112 , (pdtable_112)
When a new design area is created, a new record is added to this table. The record includes
such items as the above-mentioned discipline index number (discipline_indx_no), a unique
index number for the area (area_index_no), and the volume coordinates for that design area
38
________________ Database Tables
(volume_low_x, volume_low_y, volume_low_z, volume_high_x, volume_high_y, and

volume_high_z).
Model Data
table number = 113 , (pdtable_113)
Model files are attached to drawings as reference files; each drawing may have up to 256
reference model files attached. When a new model is created, a record of it gets added to this
table. The record includes such items as a unique index number for the model
(model_index_no), the index numbers for the discipline and design area in which it resides
(discipline_indx_no, and area_index_no), and the file location (path_name, and
Operation
2.Theory of
network_address).
DRAWING MANAGEMENT DATA
Drawing Data
When a new drawing is created, a record is added to this table. The record includes such
items as a unique index number for that drawing, the name of that drawing type, the approval
status for that drawing, and its revision information, default scale, size, and file location.
Drawing View Data

Each drawing may have up to 15 views. When a new drawing view is created, a new record is
added to this table. The record includes such items as a unique index number for that drawing
view, the view number, view name, view scale, drawing index number, view coordinates, and
drawing view type.
Drawing View Reference Model Data

When a new drawing view is created, a new record is added to this table. This table will
never have more than 256 record entries for a specific drawing view, since the maximum
number of models attached to a drawing is 256. The record includes the unique index number
of the drawing view (dwg_view_index_no), and the index number for the attached model
(model_index_no).
39
________________
Composite Drawing View Data

A composite view may consist of up to 10 sub-views. When a new composite view is created,
a new record is added to this table. The record includes such items as a unique index number
for that composite drawing view, the composite view number, the composite view name, the
composite view scale, the index number of the associated drawing, and up to ten index
numbers for the sub-views within the composite drawing view.
Drawing Revision Data

This table is used only if revision management data is used. When revision management data
is entered into a drawing, a new record is added to this table. The record includes such items
as the drawing index number, the revision index number, and the revision number, revision
date, revised by, checked by, and revision description information as entered in the Create
Drawing form of Drawing Manager.
Drawing Setup Data

This table stores the default information about drawing types that is established using the
Project Setup form. The record includes such items as the default size, scale, and seed file.
Reference Model Display Category Setup

Data
This table holds the default display status of drawing categories for reference models attached
to drawings. This data is established using the Drawing Managers Project Setup form.
Plotting Default Data

This table allows use of customized iparms files (for plotting with specific pen tables or for
rotating plots, etc.).
40
________________ Standard Notes / Code Lists
2.2.9 Standard Notes / Code Lists

PDS uses code-listed standard notes to ensure that all users share common terms for use in
drawing annotation. Code lists are also used to allow some of the Drawing Manager
conventions to have revisable field names; for instance, Drawing Type is standard note 2000.
The code-listed values for standard note 2000 are the "names" of the drawing types that
appear in the scroll list when the Create Drawing feature is used.
For more information about standard notes and code lists, refer to the
Reference Data Manager: Reference Guide.
Operation
2.Theory of
2.2.10 Labels
Drawing Manager allows placement of name labels and coordinate labels for annotation
purposes. These labels are placed through the Drawing Manager interface and are
"intelligent"; the labels will change if the item they describe changes, but only after one of the
Update Labels commands have been exceuted.
"Dumb" text, text that has no association with the PDS database, can also be placed in
drawings. Dumb text can be placed using the Place Text button in the Place Labels palette,
or through "raw" MicroStation. For more information about labels, refer to Annotating
Drawings, page 291, Update Labels, page 319, or Update Annotation Labels, page 377.
You can display dimensions as whole millimeters if you choose to do so.

During Project Setup, Project Administrator allows revision of working units
used in creating a project. Master units in a Metric project are meters, with
subunits being millimeters; however, the project administrator can designate
master units to be millimeters, with subunits set also to millimeters. This will
ensure that dimensions will be read as millimeters, not meters.
For more information about this topic, refer to Displaying Dimensions in

Whole Millimeters, page 49.
For more information about working units, refer to Project Administrator

(PD_Project).
41
________________
2.2.11 Drawing Managers Output

Drawing Managers outputs are plotted drawings and reports based on the drawings. Plotting
or printing requires that queues be created so that Drawing Manager will know where to send
the output.
Plots
Before plotting can be done, a plot queue must be established so that Drawing Manager will
know where to send the data to be plotted. For more information about plotting drawings,
refer to Plot Manager, page 411.
Reports
Drawing Manager can generate reports based on the information written in the project control
database. Reports require a format file and a discrimination data file in order to specify the
format, content, and scope of reports generated. Reports can be saved as ASCII files, or they
can be sent to a printer.
Before reports can be printed, a print queue must be established so that Drawing Manager will
know where to send the data to be printed. For more information about creating reports, refer
to Report - Drawing Management Data, page 134 . You may also refer to the Report
Manager Users Guide for more detailed information about reporting capabilities.
42
________________ Customizing Drawing Manager
2.2.12 Customizing Drawing Manager

Many aspects of Drawing Manager can be customized to meet your specific requirements, and
several of these procedures are discussed in this section. However, this section is not intended
to cover every 3D customization issue.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
Automatic Title Block Generation
Nominal Pipe Diameter Value
Operation
2.Theory of
Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters
You may refer to the index (under customization, among other keywords) for more topics
about customizing this software.
43
________________
2.2.12.1 Automatic Title Block Generation

MicroStation allows you to place text nodes in design files. Text nodes are pre-defined
locations for text to placed. They may be placed within the title block area of your border
files. The text nodes must be created within the drawing border prior to using the automated
title block feature.
You may place the text nodes on any level in the drawing border, but you must
ensure that this level is not displayed so that the nodes will not be displayed on
the plotted drawing.
When the automatic title block option is executed, all text nodes in the title
block will be replaced by the associated database string and user-defined text.
This data will be created on a level associated with the Title Block Data
category.
For more information about using text nodes, refer to the MicroStation
documentation.
Within PD_Draw, the Create Drawing and Approve Drawing commands both provide an
option to load associated text into pre-defined text nodes in the title block of a drawing.
Both options depend on an ASCII file to associate each text node to a column in the Project
Control Database. This ASCII file is called title_blk_<drawing type>, and should reside in
the project directory.
The following ASCII code will generate the data for a title block that contains the revision
number, revision date, revised by, checked by, and the revision description for the current
revision and the five previous revisions. This ASCII file will also automatically generate the
drawing title, the initials of the person who approved the drawing, the approval date, the
project number, and the drawing number.
If the drawing revision date is to be loaded into the title block, it will be
displayed in the format defined through Project Data Manager.
44
________________ Automatic Title Block Generation
! Sample ascii file for automatic title block generation

!
! This file needs to be in the project directory in order to be used
! by the title block load process. It should be named
! title_blk_<drawing type>
!
! Format of file: Node, Table, Column, Prefix, Suffix, Revision_number
!
! Node: text node in border file
! Table: pd_table number, or entity number
! Column: column number, or attribute number
! Prefix: hardcoded text prefix to be place before database data string
! Suffix: hardcoded text suffix to be place after database data string
! Revision_number: -nth revision (0 = most recent, -1 = second most recent,
! .etc.)
! NOTE: Dates are formatted according to type-63 data. Now modifiable in
Operation
2.Theory of
! the Project Data Manager.
! Rev
85,125,3, , ,-5
86,125,3, , ,-4
87,125,3, , ,-3
88,125,3, , ,-2
89,125,3, , ,-1
90,125,3, , ,0
! Date
91,125,4, , ,-5
92,125,4, , ,-4
93,125,4, , ,-3
94,125,4, , ,-2
95,125,4, , ,-1
96,125,4, , ,0
! By
97,125,5, , ,-5
98,125,5, , ,-4
99,125,5, , ,-3
100,125,5, , ,-2
101,125,5, , ,-1
102,125,5, , ,0
! Chk
103,125,6, , ,-5
104,125,6, , ,-4
105,125,6, , ,-3
106,125,6, , ,-2
107,125,6, , ,-1
108,125,6, , ,0
! Description
109,125,7, , ,-5
110,125,7, , ,-4
111,125,7, , ,-3
112,125,7, , ,-2
113,125,7, , ,-1
114,125,7, , ,0
!
! Drawing Title
115,121,3, , ,0
! Approved By Initials
116,121,5, , ,0
! Approval Date
117,121,6, , ,0
! Project No
118,101,2, , ,
! Drawing No
119,121,2, , ,
!
45
________________
2.2.12.2 The ASCII Text Node Definition File

The ASCII file that defines the text nodes treats any text following an ! in the first column as
documentation, and will ignore it.
The data string query will follow the format N,T,C,P,S,R followed by a carriage return,
where:
N = the text node number. This corresponds to the text node placed in the drawing
border.
T = the PD_table number. This corresponds with pdtable_101 (Project Description

Data), pdtable_121 (Drawing Data), pdtable_122 (Drawing View Data), and
pdtable_125 (Drawing Revision Data).
C = column or attribute number. This corresponds with a database value within a

pdtable.
P = prefix. This corresponds with user-specified text (up to 128 characters) to precede
the database string. This field is optional, but a comma must be used as a delimiter.
S = suffix. This corresponds with user-specified text (up to 128 characters) to follow
the database string. This field is optional, but a comma must be used as a delimiter.
R = the drawing revision number. This corresponds with the revision number data as
found in pdtable_125. This field is optional; if no value is entered, a default 0 for the
most current revision (-1 is the previous revision number) will be used.
The following example defines the drawing number, drawing title, and revision number to be
loaded into text nodes 2, 3, and 5:
2, 121, 2, Drawing Number:,,0

3, 121, 3, Title:,,0
5, 121, 11, ,,0
Although it is acceptable to have a text node in the drawing border without an

associated entry in the ASCII file, an error message will be generated if an
entry is found in the ASCII file for which there is no associated text node.
Automatic Title Block Generation in Create

Drawing
The Create Drawing command will generate the title block information automatically if the
ASCII file for the appropriate drawing type resides in the project directory. If the ASCII file
does not exist in the project directory, the automatic title block generation will not be enabled
for any drawing of that type.
46
________________ The ASCII Text Node Definition File
Automatic Title Block Generation in

Approve Drawing
The Approve Drawing command provides a toggle to explicitly select the option to generate
the title block information. If the ASCII file is found in the project directory, the toggle will
be set to the ON position. If the ASCII file is not found, the toggle will be disabled.
Operation
2.Theory of
47
________________
2.2.12.3 Nominal Pipe Diameter Value

There is an option in the Project Administrator module which lets you display nominal
piping diameter values as you wish, for example, inches may be displayed as " or IN.
To define a value,
1. Select Project Administrator from the Plant Design System (PD_Shell) form.
The Project Administrator form displays.
2. Select Project Data Manager from the Project Administrator form.
The Project Data Manager form displays.
3. Select Seed from the Project Data Manager form.
The form displays the various seed files which can be revised/edited to suit your needs.
4. Select Drawing Data - Revise from the available files.
The Project Data Manager - Drawings form displays.
5. Select Graphic Symbology Data from the Project Data Manager - Drawings form.
The Graphic Symbology Data form displays.
6. Change the Field Name for Nominal Piping Diameter parameter and Accept the
form.
If needed, this modification can apply to any project drawings you have already created. Just
return to the display of seed files (step 4) and select the Drawing Data - Propagate option.
This will change the NPD field on all existing drawings. For more information on this
feature, see the Project Administrator Reference Guide.
48
________________ Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters
2.2.12.4 Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters

You can display dimensions as whole millimeters if you choose to do so. During Project
Setup, Project Administrator allows revision of working units used in creating a project.
Master units in a Metric project are meters, with subunits being millimeters; however, the
project administrator can designate master units to be millimeters, with subunits set also to
millimeters. This will ensure that dimensions will be read as millimeters, not meters.
Next, modify the drawing seed file through MicroStation; select Element, then slect
Dimensions, then select Units to activate the Units form.
Set Primary Units to Metric. Set Format to AEC. Set Accuracy to zero (0). Set Label to
Operation
2.Theory of
x1/2. Select No Secondary Units.
The Units form with the appropriate settings is shown below.
This will display the dimension units in millimeters with no decimal places. For example,
you wiil see 1927 mm instead of the default 1.927 m or 1927.0 mm.
For more information about working units, please refer to Project Administrator
(PD_Project).
49
________________
50
________________ Drawing Management
3. Drawing Management
The Drawing Manager option activates the Drawing Management form. It is used to create
and manipulate drawings and drawing views for an existing model at any point in the design
process. It also provides access to the interactive graphics environment for drawings.
Management
3.Drawing
Commands
Drawing Manager Creates, copies, revises, and deletes drawings, drawing views,
and reports.
Drawing Composition / Annotation Activates the interactive graphics

environment for drawings. The Drawing Composition commands create, attach, and
modify drawing views. The Annotation commands place annotation graphics in the
drawing.
Update Annotation Labels Updates annotation labels without requiring you to

enter the graphics environment.
Vector Hidden Line Manager Creates hidden-line-removed graphics for a

specified drawing.
Search Criteria for VHL Creates the search criteria used for symbology based
VHL drawing creation.
51
________________
Plot Manager Provides a PDS-specific interface for plotting drawings with a full
display control including manipulation of reference files.
Project Planner Creates and revises a Key Plan model file for the project and
creates unassigned drawing views.
Project Setup Defines the default creation definitions based on the drawing type,
reference models, drawing size, and drawing scale. Once you have defined a project
setup, the system only includes the default reference models and categories you specify
when creating a drawing or drawing view. See the Group Workflow section in the
Using the Drawing Management Commands section that follows for information on
when to use this command.
Plot Setup Manager Creates, revises, and deletes I/Plot Parameter files.
52
________________ Using the Drawing Management Commands
3.1 Using the Drawing Management

Commands
About Drawing Management
The Drawing Management options allow you to create and revise orthographic production
drawings. They also allow you to create drawing views for these drawings. You can report on
drawing information in the Project Control Database and on model data in specified drawings
and drawing views. You can place annotation labels, create hidden-line-removed model
graphics, and plot a drawing or set of drawings.
When to Use These Commands

You can create a drawing during any stage of the design process. It consists of the reference
model attachments for the model graphics used in the drawing and the graphics for the
drawing itself. The model graphics reside in the design file for that model. These model
graphics are attached to the drawing as reference files through the use of drawing views. You
Management
3.Drawing
can also create up to 15 drawing views for each drawing.
Before Using These Commands

Besides the basic project setup which is explained in Chapter 1, there are a few steps that must
be done prior to activating the Drawing Management options in order to use all of the
functionality that they provide.
The Drawing Manager option provides access to the Report - Model Data option which is
used to generate reports from models within a drawing using report definition data. Part of
this definition data is a format file. The format file is not generated interactively within the
PDS environment. A sample format file is provided in the \win32app\ingr\pdreport\sample
directory. The format file is named piping_#.fmt. You should copy this file to the directory
you will use for your report-related files. For more information on reporting and report
definition data, refer to Chapter 4.
Group Workflow
If you decide to use the Project Setup option to define defaults for the drawings and drawing
views that will be created during the project, you should use this command first. It allows you
to define the default creation definitions based on the drawing type, reference models,
drawing size, and drawing scale. Once you have defined the project setup, the system only
includes the default reference categories you have specified when creating a drawing or
drawing view. If you do not use this command, all reference categories are available each
time you create a drawing or drawing view.
53
________________
There is no particular workflow for the rest of the commands after the first drawing has been
created. Of course, you must create a drawing before a drawing view can be created.
54
________________ Drawing Manager
4. Drawing Manager
This option activates the Drawing Manager form. It is also activated when the Report -
Drawing Management Data option is selected. This form is used to create, revise, and delete
drawings and drawing views. It is also used to create and revise reports and to specify
approval data for both drawings and reports. The following sections describe the basic
operations involved in creating and modifying drawings, drawing views, and reports.
Commands
Create Creates drawings, drawing views, and composite drawing views. Also
creates and composes drawing views and composite drawing views.
Manager
4.Drawing
Revise Revises drawing definitions, drawing views, graphic drawings, and plotplan
graphics.
Delete Deletes drawings and drawing views.
Report - Drawing Management Data Creates reports on drawings in the project.
Report - Model Data Defines and creates reports of model data in a specified
drawing or drawing view.
Approve Drawing Defines the drawing approval data for the production stages
(creation/revision) of a project drawing.
55
________________
Steps
1. Select the Drawing Manager option from the Drawing Management form.
The system activates the Drawing Manager form.
2. Select one of the Drawing Manager options.
OR
Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Management form.
56
________________ Create Options
4.1 Create Options

This option activates the Create Options form. It is used to create and compose drawings,
drawing views, and composite drawing views.
When a Create option is selected, the list of Drawing Types (Standard Note Type 2000) will
be displayed in a scroll list on the right.
For the complete list of delivered drawing types, refer to the Standard Note
Library Listings section in the PDS Reference Data Manager.
The names of the drawing types may be changed to suit your preferences. This
is done using the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDS Reference
Data Manager.
Manager
4.Drawing
Commands
Create Drawing Creates the drawing and specifies the drawing parameters.
Create Drawing View from ASCII File Creates a drawing view from a user-
defined ASCII file.
Copy Drawing Copies a selected drawing into the specified directory on the
specified node.
Create Drawing View Creates the drawing views for use by the drawing and
defines the parameters necessary to create the drawing view.
Copy Drawing View Specifies the data required for copying drawing views from
one drawing to another or within the same drawing.
57
________________
Create Composite Drawing View Creates a composite drawing view and defines
the parameters necessary to create it.
Steps
1. Select the Create option from the Drawing Manager form.
The system displays the Create Options form.
2. Select one of the Drawing Manager options.
For each of the Create options, the system displays the available Drawing types in the
display list.
3. Accept Or Select Option Or Drawing Type
Select the type of drawing to be used from the display list, and select Accept to
continue.
The system displays the create form for the selected option and drawing type.
OR
Before creating drawings or view, refer to Project Setup, page 457 for
detailed information on attaching reference disciplines, etc.
58
________________ Create Drawing
4.1.1 Create Drawing

This option activates the Create Drawing form. It is used to create a drawing using the
drawing filename and parameters specified. The illustrations in this section reflect a
Equipment Arrangement Drawing type; however, the operation is the same for all drawing
types.
The seed file for drawing creation is created automatically when you create a project. Refer to
the PDS Project Administrator Reference Database Users Guide for more information on
project creation.
Field Descriptions
Drawing Number Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 24 characters) to define the
Manager
4.Drawing
drawing number (short name) of the drawing file to be created.
Special characters such as & $ @ - / . + = # * and a blank space cannot be used to

define the drawing number.
Drawing Name Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 40 characters) to define the

long name of the drawing file to be created.
Default Scale Place a data point in this field to display the scroll list of drawing
scale options. Select the desired drawing scale value from the list.
English Units - m m"=n n" where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale on
the model. For example, 1/4"=1 indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1
foot in the model.
59
________________
OR
Metric Units - n:nn where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on the
model. For example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm in
the model.
Drawing scale values are code-listed as Standard Note Type 1201. For
the complete list of delivered drawing scale values, refer to the
Standard Note Library Listings section in the PDS Reference Data
Manager.
The drawing scale values may be changed to suit your preferences. This
is done using the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDS
Reference Data Manager.
Drawing Size Place a data point in this field to display the scroll list of drawing
border size options. Select the desired drawing border size from the list.
Refer to Drawing Plot Size, page 31 for information on the drawing border reference
files for the various sizes and drawing types.
English Units
A 8 1/2 X 11
B 11 X 17
C 17 X 22
D 22 X 34
E 34 X 44
F 28 X 40
Metric Units
A0 840mm X 1189mm
A1 595mm X 840mm
A2 420mm X 595mm
A3 297mm X 420mm
A4 210mm X 297mm
Drawing size values are code-listed as Standard Note Type 1202. The
drawing size values may be changed to suit your preferences. This is
done using the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDS
Reference Data Manager.
Drawing File Name The system fills in the design file name (up to 14 characters
total) as the drawing number with the file extension of .dgn. If the drawing number is
greater than 11 characters, it is truncated to allow character space for the file extension.
You can modify the Drawing File Name.
Drawing File Directory Key in the location of the directory to contain the drawing
file.
60
________________ Create Drawing
Workstation/Server Name Key in the node address of the workstation to contain

the drawing file.
Last Revision Number This field displays the current revision number of the
drawing. This field cannot be edited by the user.
Revision Number Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revision

of the drawing. This field is optional.
Revised By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who

revised the drawing. This field is optional.
Checked By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who

checked the drawing. This field is optional.
Revision Description Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide a

description of this revision of the drawing. This field is optional.
Steps
1. Select the Create Drawing option and drawing type from the Create Options form.
The system displays the Create Drawing form.
2. Key in the drawing number and name information.
3. Place a data point in the drawing size information fields to display a list of choices.
Select the desired choice from the scroll list.
4. Key in the scale, drawing size, pathname, and network address information.
Manager
4.Drawing
5. If revision management will be used, key in the revision management data.
6. Accept or Reject
Select the defined drawing file parameters and select Accept.
Creating Drawing
The system copies the drawing seed file for the project to the specified drawing design
file. It then clears the fields and the cursor returns to the beginning field.
7. Repeat the above step to define additional drawing files.
OR
Select Cancel to exit and return to the previous form.
61
________________
4.1.2 Create Drawing from ASCII File

This command activates the Create Drawing with ASCII File form. It is used to create
drawings and optional drawing views from a user-defined ASCII file. You can define as
many drawings as necessary with one ASCII file. You can also define up to 15 drawing views
for every drawing. Drawing views can only be created in conjunction with a drawing. You
can select the active drawing type from a list of drawing types in the drawing management
data of the Project Control Database. You can also submit the process immediately or select
delayed batch processing. This command uses the PDcreate_dwg batch queue for processing.
The batch process returns a mail message which reports any errors that occurred during the
creation process. The message reports any drawings or drawing views that were not created,
and reports the reason the process failed. If an error occurs while creating a drawing view, the
related drawing and drawing views are still created, but you need to use the Create Drawing
View command to create the drawing view in which the error occurred. If a specified
reference model cannot be attached, the drawing view is still created. The system sends you a
mail message indicating which reference models were not attached.
The system uses the PDcreate_dwg queue for this command.
62
________________ Create Drawing from ASCII File
Commands
Submit Batch Immediately / Delayed Batch Submit Time Submits or delays
submission of the job. When the toggle is set to Delayed Batch Submit Time, the
system displays time fields which allow you to delay submission until a more
convenient time.
Field Definitions
ASCII File Name Key in the name of the ASCII file to use to create the drawing.
This file contains the information to create the drawing and optional drawing views.
Directory Key in the path name where the ASCII file resides.
Network Address Key in the network address where the ASCII file resides.
Before using this command

You must create an ASCII file using the following format. Follow the examples on the right
of the colons when you enter the data for your project. From Drawing_Number to
Network_Address is information defining a drawing. Drawing_Number indicates a new
drawing. Every drawing view is associated with the drawing that is defined above it. Each
drawing view must be associated with a drawing. From View_Number to Reference_Models
is information defining a drawing view. You can define multiple drawings and drawing views
Manager
4.Drawing
with one ASCII file. You must define the drawing view volume for each drawing view. It
can not be defined using a saved view.
Precede all comments with an exclamation mark (!), as shown below.
Drawing_Number:00ascii02
Drawing_Name: ASCII Creation
!Each drawing name specifies a new drawing and each
!drawing view specified between two drawing-name fields
!is related to the proceeding drawing name.
Default_Scale:3/8"=1
Drawing_Size:1
File_Spec:draw005.dgn
Path_Name:c:\newpipe\
Network_Address:deason
!Next line begins drawing view definition
View_Number:d0005
View_Name:Plan
!This drawing view is associated with the 00ascii02
!ASCII Creation drawing.
View_Scale:3/8"=1
Orientation:1
63
________________
Easting_Low:1358:0
Northing_Low:415:0
Elevation_Low:9:11
Easting_High:1376:0
Northing_High:433:0
Elevation_High:27:11
Composition_Point:5
Reference_Models:bcpipe01,38pip01,39pipe01
File Field Definitions

Drawing_Number: Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 24 characters) to define the
drawing number (short name) of the drawing file to be created, use lower case letters
only. Special characters such as & $ - / . + = # * and a blank space cannot be used to
define the drawing number.
Drawing_Name: Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 40 characters) to define the

long name of the drawing file to be created. This information is optional.
Default_Scale: Key in the drawing scale. If a value is not specified, the default
scale is used.
Drawing_Size: Key in a standard note value for the border size. Refer to the
Drawing Plot Size Table in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information on the
drawing border reference files for the various sizes and drawing types. The standard
note value and not the standard note text must be used in this field. This value can be
found in Standard Note 1202.
File_Spec: Key in the drawing design file name, use lower case letters. Be sure to
include the .dgn extension.
Path_Name: Key in the path name where the drawing design file resides. If a value
is not specified or a keyword missing, the system will use the data specified in the
Project Setup command.
Network_Address: Key in the network address where the drawing design file
resides. If a value is not specified or a keyword missing, the system uses the data
specified in the Project Setup command.
View_Number: Key in a drawing view number for this drawing.
View_Name: Key in the drawing view name for this drawing view.
View_Scale: Key in the view scale. If a value is not specified or the keyword is
missing, the default scale for the drawing is used.
Orientation: Key in the standard note value for the orientation. Do not use the
standard note text in this field. This value is defined in Standard Note 1620.
Easting_Low:, Northing_Low:, and Elevation_Low Key in the absolute Easting,

Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form
X X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or
negative elevation.)
64
________________ Create Drawing from ASCII File
The values for the volume coordinates may be in any format that
MicroStation will accept for keyed-in dimension data. For example, the
value for two feet, six and one half inches may be expressed as 0:30.5,
26.5", 2:6 1/2, 2:6.5, 30.5", or 2.55.
Easting_High:, Northing_High:, and Elevation_High Key in the absolute

Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube.
This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.
Composition Point Key in one of the following numerical values that relate to a
composition point. Key in 1 for left-top, 2 for right-top, 3 for left-bottom, 4 for right-
bottom, or 5 for center composition.
This keyword is optional; do not include it within the ASCII file if you
do not wish to assign a value to it.
Reference_Models: Key in the reference model numbers as used in the model

management data of the Project Control Database. Separate each model number with a
comma. The maximum line length is 132 characters. End each line that will be
followed by another line of model numbers with a dash (-) to define more reference
models. Each drawing created from an ASCII file must have at least one value for this
keyword.
Other Valid Keywords

You may also include other keywords in the ASCII file to perform specific functions.
MD_PROPAGATED and MD_SPARSE You may add keywords to the ASCII file
that specify whether "propagated" (including sparse models propagated onto
themselves) or just "sparse" structural models are to be attached to the drawing view.
The default is that drawings will be created with propagated structural models;
Manager
4.Drawing
however, the keywords MD_PROPAGATED or MD_SPARSE may be included
within the drawing view definition before the REFERENCE_MODELS keyword to
specify which type to attach.
The batch process will return a mail message if a sparse model has been selected
within the ACSII file, but has not been defined within the model management data of
the Project Control Database. This could be the result of the following situations:
1. The ModelDraft project in question is not included within the PDS project; this
would mean that structural models were done outside of PDS, and no entries for the
sparse models exist in PD_Table 113.
2. The ModelDraft project in question is included within the PDS project, but no
models have yet been created.
The Create Drawing from ASCII File command will restrict you to creating
only drawing views of the type specified by keyword (propagated or sparse).
If no keyword is used, by default the drawing views will be created using
propagated structural models.
65
________________
MATCHLINES You may also add the keyword MATCHLINES to automatically

create match lines and corresponding coordinate labels during the creation of a drawing
view.
If prompted to... Do this:
Keyin Data or Select Option Key in the file specifications, then set the submit toggle
to the desired setting. Select Accept to create the
drawing(s) and drawing view(s) with the specified
ASCII file.
If an error occurs in creating a drawing view, the drawing to which the view is
associated and any other drawing views for that drawing will be created. In
this situation, you must create the desired drawing view manually.
If a reference model can not be attached, an error will be reported to you

through the mail message, and the drawing view will be not be created.
In order to load title block information after drawing creation by ASCII file, go
to the Revise Drawing form and select Load Title Block.
66
________________ Copy Drawing
4.1.3 Copy Drawing

This option is used to copy the information about one drawing so it may be modified for use
as another drawing. Selecting the Copy Drawing option activates the Drawing Type scroll
list. The system then expects you to select a drawing type before further action can be taken.
Once a drawing type is selected and accepted, the system will activate the Select Drawing
form. Once a drawing has been selected and accepted, the system displays the Copy
Drawing form.
When a drawing is copied, the source drawing will be automatically attached

as a reference file to the destination drawing for the purpose of sharing
annotation. Drawing annotation, revision clouds and triangles, and vector
hidden line graphics will not be copied into the destination drawing.
Drawings with rotated views should not be copied, as it will produce incorrect
Manager
4.Drawing
results.
Commands
Select All Views Highlights all available views to be copied into the destination
drawing.
Clear All Views Clears all views so that none are copied into the destination
drawing.
Drawing View Data Activates the Drawing View Data form. It is used to revise
the definition data for drawing views. For more information about this option, refer to
Drawing View Data, page 70.
67
________________
Field Descriptions
SOURCE DATA
Project Displays the name of the project
Drawing Type Displays the name of the drawing to be copied. If a data point is
placed in this field, the Drawing Type scroll list will be activated so that a different
drawing type can be selected for copying.
Drawing Number Displays the number of the drawing to be copied. If a data point
is placed in this field, the Drawing Number scroll list will be activated so that a
different drawing can be selected for copying.
DESTINATION DATA
Drawing Type Displays the drawing type of the destination drawing. The default
will be the drawing type of the copied drawing. To change the drawing type of the
destination drawing, place a data point in the field. This will display the scroll list of all
possible drawing types.
Drawing Number Key in the drawing number to represent the destination drawing.
Drawing Name Displays the drawing name of the destination drawing. The name
of the source drawing will remain until another name is keyed into the field.
Drawing Default Scale Displays the drawing scale of the destination drawing. The
default will be the scale of the copied drawing. To change the scale of the destination
drawing, place a data point in the field. This will display the scroll list of all possible
drawing scales.
Drawing Default Size Displays the drawing size of the destination drawing. The
default will be the size of the copied drawing. To change the size of the destination
drawing, place a data point in the field. This will display the scroll list of all possible
drawing sizes.
Drawing File Name Displays the file name of the destination drawing. The file
name of the source drawing will remain until another file name is keyed into the field.
Drawing File Directory Displays the directory path of the destination drawing. The
directory of the source drawing will remain until another directory path is keyed into
the field.
Workstation/Server Displays the workstation/server name of the destination

drawing. The workstation/server name of the source drawing will remain until another
workstation/server name is keyed into the field.
68
________________ Copy Drawing
You must activate all fields that expect keyed-in data and press <RETURN> in
each one before the entire form can be accepted.
Specify Drawing Number Place a data point in the Drawing Number field, then
key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identify the
destination drawing.
Specify Drawing Name Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe the

Specify Design File Name Key in the file name for the design file.
You must follow the filename convention of filename.ext, where the filename
cannot exceed 8 characters and is followed by a period (.) and a 3-character
extension.
Specify Destination Directory

Key in the path to the directory in which you want the file to reside.
Specify Network Address

Key in the network address of the machine in which you want the file to reside.
Specify Drawing View Data

Select Drawing View Data, to specify and name the drawing views to be copied into
the destination drawing. This form also allows you to specify reference models to be
copied.
Manager
4.Drawing
69
________________
4.1.3.1 Drawing View Data

This option activates the Drawing View Data form. This form allows you to specify the
views that will be copied into the destination drawing. You may change the name and
number of the views being copied into destination drawing, and you may add or remove
reference models to or from specific drawing views.
Commands
Select All Views This command highlights all displayed views for copying into the
Clear All Views This command prohibits all views in the display list from being
copied into the destination drawing.
Add/Delete Reference Models This command allows you to add or remove

reference models to or from specific views as they are copied into the destination
drawing.
Attach Model activates a discipline list that allows you to select which disciplines data
will be copied into the destination drawing view. When a discipline is selected and
accepted, the system prompts you to select the areas that encompass the desired
reference models. You may either select all models within an area (Attach by Area),
or you may select specific models within areas (Select Models).
Detach Model removes the selected model, after confirmation, from the reference
model list.
Auto Attach/Verify activates a the Pre-Defined/All Disciplines toggle. Depending on

the setting of this toggle, acceptance of this form displays a list of reference models
either from all disciplines, or from only the pre-defined disciplines for that drawing
type. You may select specific reference models from the list by placing a data button
70
________________ Drawing View Data
on the appropriate models, or you can automatically select all models by selecting the
Select All command.
Enter New View Number and New View Name

Place data points in the appropriate fields so that you
may specify the name and number for the destination
views. Highlighted views will be copied; to keep a
view from being copied, place a data point on it so that
it will no longer be highlighted.
Views being copied into the destination drawing must have a unique view
name.
Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline that contains the area that contains
the drawing view to be copied.
Select Area or Exit Select the area that contains the drawing view to be
copied.
Select Drawing View Select a drawing view that contains a model to attach (or
detach) to the destination drawing view, then select
Accept.
Select Model Select a model to attach (or detach) to the destination

drawing view (or select Select All to select all models
on the list, then select the appropriate command (Attach
Model or Detach Model).
OR
Manager
4.Drawing
Select Auto Attach/Verify to get a complete list of
reference models from all disciplines, or from only the
pre-defined disciplines for that drawing type.
Toggle (Pre-Defined/All) and Accept

Place a data button on the toggle to change its value to
the desired setting.
71
________________
4.1.4 Create Drawing View

This option creates a drawing view for an existing drawing. You can specify the drawing
view by:
using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model,
selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used,
or setting the data coordinates and clipping volume to create a drawing view for a
specifed named item. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the
drawing view and defines the orientation.

If you plan to use a saved view to define the drawing view, the saved view must be created in
the model before selecting this command.
Field Descriptions
View Number Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view number
(short code - up to 6 characters) for the drawing view to be created. The system verifies
that the drawing view number is unique within the project.
View Name Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view name (long
description - up to 40 characters) associated with the specified drawing view.
View Scale Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list and specify a
new scale value for the drawing view. The default scale value is the same as the value
used when the drawing was created.
72
________________ Create Drawing View
Drawing View Volume Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation
coordinates for opposite corner points for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a
negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
Commands
Place Match Lines / No Match Lines Places match lines and the corresponding
coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. This option is only available for
plan or rotated plan views. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries of
the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to each
match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing views.
The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawing
category, Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the user-
defined drawing annotation category that was previously called Match Lines is
now called Match Lines by User.
The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the Coordinate
Labels category, as are all other coordinate labels.
The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing views
clipping boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the Project
Control Database. A line spacing factor specified for this option through
Project Data Manager will determine the distance between the match line and
the coordinate label.
These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will be
appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View or
Move Drawing View commands are used.
Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line
Manager
4.Drawing
spacing for all other coordinate lables will be used.
The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate labels text will be
determined on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data
Manager, as it is for any other coordinate label. If the coordinate label does
not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbology data for the default
coordinate label will be used.
The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default
values until you specify different values through Project Data Manager:
level = 62
color = 0 (white)
weight = 0
73
________________
line style = 0
Named Item Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically
defined named item to create the drawing view. Refer to Named Item, page 76 for more
information.
Saved View Uses a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping
volume of the drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 82 for more information.
Define View Location Defines the location of the drawing view within the
drawing border and automatically composes the drawing view. Refer to Define View
Location, page 83 for more information.
Although you will not be prompted to define the view location, you should use
the Define View Location command between defining the view parameters
and confirming the form.
Specify Drawing View Number

Key in up to 6 alphanumeric characters to identify the
drawing view to be created.
Specify Drawing View Name Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe the

Select Drawing View Orientation

Select one of the seven view orientation options from
the center of the form.
Specify Clipping Volume Key in the view coordinates to define the clipping
volume. (The system does not have to have the Low
coordinates in the Low field and the High coordinates in
the High field; the command will work properly as long
as the coordinated entered are diagonally opposed.)
OR
Select the Named Item option to use the data

coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically
defined named item to create the drawing view. Refer to
Named Item, page 76 for more information.
OR
Select the Saved View option to use a saved view model

to define the orientation and clipping volume of the
drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 82 for more
information.
74
Accept or Select Other Options

Select Accept to continue.
Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline to be used to create the drawing
view, and select Accept to continue.
When the toggle is set to Select Models, the system displays the models for
the selected area. The Attach by Area setting will attach all reference models
in the chosen area.
Select Area or Exit Select the Area to be used to attach the drawing view.
Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model
files for a specified area or to Select Models to specify
the individual reference models to be attached.
Select Model Select the model to be used to attach the drawing view.
The system uses the default model data categories defined using the Project
Setup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the models
selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays all categories.
Manager
4.Drawing
75
________________
4.1.4.1 Named Item

This option activates the Create Drawing View from Named Item form. It is used to define
the data coordinates and clipping volume for a drawing view from a named item.
Before Using This Option

The view number and name of the drawing view to be created must be specified on the
Create Drawing View form.
You must know the item number of the component you are going to use to define the
data coordinates and clipping volume.
Field Descriptions
Delta Coordinates Defines the distance from the center to the edges of the cube
which fits the named item. When you select a model, its delta coordinates are displayed
automatically. You can change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed
clipping volume.
coordinates for diagonally-opposed corners of the cube in the form X X". (You can
use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
Commands
Select By Model Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named item
that resides within a selected model. First, you select one of the Number options, and
the system displays the appropriate Area and Model display lists. After you select a
model, its number is displayed and you must enter the item number of component to
use. The system searches the selected model for that component.
76
________________ Named Item
Select By Project Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named item
that resides anywhere in the project. First, you select a Number option and then enter
the item number. The system searches the entire project for that component.
Specify Component Number Set the Select By Model/Select By Project toggle to the
appropriate setting, then select one of the Number
commands to specify a named item.
See the Named Item by Model, page 232, and Named Item by Project, page 234, sections for
more information.
Manager
4.Drawing
77
________________
4.1.4.1.1 Named Item by Model

delta coordinates and clipping volume.
Commands
the item number. The system will search the entire project for that component.
Piping Component Number Defines the type of named item as a piping

component, then activates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area that
contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and accepted,
you must then specify the component number for the specific named item.
Instrument Component Number Defines the type of named item as an instrument

component, then activates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area that
contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and accepted,
you must then specify the component number for the specific named item.
Equipment Number Defines the type of named item as an equipment item, then
activates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area that contains the model that
contains the named item. Once an area is selected and accepted, you must then specify
the component number for the specific named item.
78
________________ Named Item by Model
Equipment Number & Nozzle Number Defines the type of named item as an
equipment item with a nozzle item, then activates a series of forms that prompt you to
select the area that contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is
selected and accepted, you must then specify the component number for the specific
named item.
Select Model Changes the model after one has already been selected through one of
the Number options.
Field Descriptions
which fits the named item. When the named item has been defined, its delta
coordinates are displayed automatically. You can then change any of the Delta
Coordinates to revise the displayed clipping volume.
coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You can use a
Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second
corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner
point.
Select Area or Exit Select the area that contains the model that contains the
named item, and select Accept.
Select Model or Exit Select the model that contains the named item, and
select Accept.
Manager
4.Drawing
Specify Component Number Place a data point in the field left of the model-name
display field, key in the appropriate item number for the
component in the model and select and press <Enter>.
For an Equipment Number & Nozzle Number entry, enter the equipment
number followed by a slash (/) and then the nozzle number, for instance,
equipnum/nozzlenum.
79
________________
4.1.4.1.2 Named Item by Project

This option selects a named item from any of the models in the project to define the delta
coordinates and clipping volume for the drawing view.

Commands
that resides within a selected model. First, you select one of the Number options, the
system will display the appropriate Area and Model display lists. After you select a
use. The system will search the selected model for that component.

component.

component.
Equipment Number Defines the type of named item as an equipment item.
equipment item with a nozzle item.
80
________________ Named Item by Project
Field Descriptions
clipping volume.
point.
Specify Component Number Place a data point in the field and key in the appropriate
item number to specify either the Piping Component
Number, Instrument Component Number,
Equipment Number, or Equipment Number &
Nozzle Number for the named item in the project.
equipnum/nozzlenum.
Manager
4.Drawing
81
________________
4.1.4.2 Saved View

This option creates a drawing view using a model saved view to define the orientation,
clipping volume, and reference model inclusion. Reference models are not filtered on the
basis of the discipline defined using the Project Setup command but instead, are available
regardless of their discipline if they are in the saved view.
When creating a drawing view using a model view that was saved prior to this enhancement,
the Saved Model View command attaches the reference models active at the time the drawing
view is created. Otherwise, it attaches the reference models associated with the model at the
time the saved model view was created. You can revise the reference model attachments.

A saved view must have been defined while working in one of the PDS 3D-Modeling
tasks.
Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline containing the model with the saved
view, and select Accept.
Select Area or Exit Select the area containing the model with the saved
Select Model Select the model for the drawing view to be created, and
select Accept.
Select Saved View Select the saved view name for the drawing view to be
created, and select Accept.
82
________________ Define View Location
4.1.4.3 Define View Location

This option activates the Define View Location form. It is used to define the location of a
drawing view relative to the cutting edge of the drawing border and composes it
automatically. The distance between the drawing view border and the drawing border is
specified in the drawplotsize file and is defined by the size of the drawing. Refer to the
Drawing Plot Size Table section in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information.

Commands
Manager
4.Drawing
Upper Left Defines the drawing view location in the upper left quadrant of the
drawing view border.
Upper Right Defines the drawing view location in the upper right quadrant of the
Center Defines the drawing view location in the center of the drawing view border.
Lower Left Defines the drawing view location in the lower left quadrant of the
Lower Right Defines the drawing view location in the lower right quadrant of the
83
________________
Field Descriptions
x1 Displays the x1 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds
with the value of X-l as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this
document.
y1 Displays the y1 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds
with the value of Y-t as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this
document.
with the value of X-r as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this
document.
y2 Displays the y2 distance from the drawing view border. Displays the x2 distance
from the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of Y-b as
described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document.
Specify Drawing View Location

Place a data point on the button representing the
quadrant where the drawing should be placed.
84
________________ Copy Drawing View
4.2 Copy Drawing View

This option activates the Copy Drawing View form. It is used to copy an existing drawing
view for the same or a different drawing. This option also allows composite drawing views to
be copied.
When a drawing view of one drawing type is copied into a drawing of a

different drawing type, this command will attach the deisciplines as specified
for the destination drawing type in Project Setup Manager.
Do not copy rotated views, since the drawing orientation is not stored in the database.
If you do copy a rotated view, the resulting view will not be rotated. Isometric views
can be copied, so this warning does not apply to them.
Manager
4.Drawing
Field Descriptions
Source Data
Drawing Type Displays the discipline of the drawing selected.
Drawing Number Displays the drawing number selected.
View Number Select a view number from a list of existing drawing views for the
selected drawing.
Destination Data
Drawing Number Select the drawing number from a list of existing drawing which
will receive the new drawing view.
85
________________
Drawing View Number Key in the drawing view number (up to 6 characters) for
the drawing view to be created.
Drawing View Name Key in the drawing view name (up to 40 characters) for the
new drawing view.
Drawing View Scale Select a scale value from the drawing view scale.
Composition Options
Define Location Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the drawing
border and composes the drawing view automatically. See Define View Location, page
83 for more information.
Do Not Compose Attaches the view to the drawing, but does not compose it. The
view will not be displayed in graphics.
Compose Coincident Defines the composition point of the destination drawing

view to be the same as the source drawing view, when the drawing view is being copied
from a different drawing. Therefore, the drawing view will have the same location in
the destination drawing as in the source drawing. If the composition point for the
source drawing is not defined, this option is not active.
This allows drawing annotation to be shared using the Overlay Drawing Annotation
option. See Overlay Drawing, page 336 for more information.
86
level = 62
color = 0 (white)
weight = 0
line style = 0
Select Drawing View Select the Drawing View Number of the drawing view
to be copied.

Place a data point in the Drawing View Number: field
and key in the drawing view number (up to 6 characters)
for the drawing view to be created.
Manager
4.Drawing
The view number must be unique within the project. If you key in a number
currently in use, the system will display an error message informing you that
the view number is not unique.
Specify Drawing View Name Place a data point in the Drawing View Name: field and
key in the drawing view name (up to 40 characters) for
the new drawing view.
Accept to Copy Drawing View

Select Accept to copy the drawing view.
87
________________
4.3 Create Composite Drawing View

This command activates the Create Composite Drawing View form. It is used to create a
composite view and attach reference model files to individual drawing views within the
composite drawing view.
The composite drawing view is the composite of up to ten drawing views and its volume is
the composite volume of those views. You can define each of the individual views by:
Setting the Clipping Volume to define a drawing view as a specific clipping volume
(cube) in the model design file.
Specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model. The saved
view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.
For either of the above options, you can specify the active category data for the drawing view.
Commands
Orientation Select one of the seven options to specify the viewing direction of the
drawing view.
88
________________ Create Composite Drawing View
level = 62
color = 0 (white)
weight = 0
line style = 0
Manager
4.Drawing
Define Views for Composite Drawing View Defines, revises, or rejects drawing
views for the composite drawing view. See Define Views for Composite Drawing View,
page 242 for more information.
Define View Location Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the
drawing border and have the drawing view composed automatically. See Define View
Field Descriptions
Composite View Number Key in the composite drawing view number (short name
- up to 6 characters) for the composite drawing view to be created. The system verifies
that the number is unique within the project.
89
________________
Composite View Name Key in the view name (long description - up to 40

characters) associated with the specified composite drawing view.
Composite View Scale The scale value specified when the drawing was created is
automatically filled in. Select the field to activate a scale display list, and select from
the available scale values to change the scale to be used for the composite drawing
view.

Key in up to 6 alphanumeric characters to identify the
composite drawing view to be created.
Specify Drawing View Name Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe the


Select one of the seven view orientation options from
the center of the form.
Select Individual Views Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject drawing
views for the composite drawing view. See Define
Views for Composite Drawing View, page 92 for more
information.
THEN
Select Accept for all of the specified views for the

Accept or Select Another Option

Select the Define View Location option to pre-define
the location of the drawing view within the drawing
border and have the drawing view composed
automatically.
THEN
Select Accept for all of the specified views for the

Select Area or Exit Select the area to attach to the drawing view or the area
that contains the models to be attached.
Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model files for a specified
area or to Select Models to specify the individual reference models to be
attached.
90
________________ Create Composite Drawing View
Steps
1. Select Create Composite Drawing View.
2. Select the discipline from the Drawing Types list, and Accept.
3. Select the drawing from the drawing list, and Accept.
The system activates the Create Composite Drawing View form.
4. Select the Composite View Number field and key in the number (up to six
alphanumeric characters). The system verifies that the number is unique within the
project.
5. Select the Composite View Name field and key in the name (up to 40 characters).
6. Select the Composite View Scale field, select a value from the displayed list, and
Accept.
7. Select one of the Orientation options to specify the viewing direction of the drawing
view.
Manager
4.Drawing
91
________________
4.3.1 Define Views for Composite Drawing View

This option activates the Drawing Views field. It is used to define, revise, or reject individual
drawing views for the composite drawing view.
Commands
Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View Defines the clipping volume
for a drawing view using a model saved view. See Define Composite Drawing Views
with Saved View, page 94 for more information.
Reject View Deletes the view from the selected composite drawing view.
Field Descriptions
Drawing Views Displays the drawing views as they are defined. Each time a
drawing view volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updates
this field. You may define up to ten views.
Drawing View Volume Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation
Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second
point.
92
________________ Define Views for Composite Drawing View
Specify Clipping Volume Specify the Drawing View Volume coordinates as

follows to define the individual drawing views for the
Key in each coordinate individually or select the Saved

View option to use a model saved view to define the
clipping volume for a drawing view. See Define
Composite Drawing Views with Saved View, page 94
for more information.
OR
Select a drawing view and select the Reject View to

delete the view from the selected composite drawing
view.
Accept or Select Another Option

Select Accept for all of the view definitions.
When this form is accepted, the system creates the composite drawing view in
the database. The center of the MicroStation reference file attachment for the
first saved model view definition specified is used to position the composite
drawing view during drawing composition. The system determines the
location of the remaining reference file attachments for the corresponding
saved model view definitions relative to the first reference file attachment.
The categories of data displayed and plotted in each of the drawing views is
determined from the corresponding saved model view definitions used to
define the viewing direction and the clipping limits.
Manager
4.Drawing
93
________________
4.3.1.1 Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View

The Saved View option is used to specify a model saved view to define the clipping volume
of a drawing view that is being added to a composite drawing view.
You can create as many as ten drawing views, and the Drawing Views field is updated as
each view is created.

The composite drawing view number, name, scale, and orientation must be specified.
Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline for the composite drawing view to
be created, and select Accept.
Select Area or Exit Select the area for the composite drawing view to be
Select Model Select the model for the composite drawing view to be
selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays the categories that are
active in the selected models.
Select Saved Model View Select the saved view name to be used to define the
clipping volume of the composite drawing view, and
select Accept.
94
________________ Create Composite Drawing Views Example
4.3.2 Create Composite Drawing Views Example

You can create a composite drawing view and attach reference model files to individual
drawing views within the composite drawing view. The composite drawing view is the
composite of up to ten drawing views and its volume is the composite volume of those views.
Youll want to do this when, for example, the model looks like this:
And this is how you want the drawing file to look.
Manager
4.Drawing
95
________________
Before you create the composite drawing view, youll need to know the coordinates for
all volumes to be used.
Write down two sets of coordinates (low and high) for each volume. These will define
the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the two corner points for
the volume. The second point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.
(You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative
elevation.)
The individual views can overlap each other.
96
Create composite drawing view name and

number:
2. Select the discipline from the Drawing Type list, and Accept.
3. Select the drawing from the drawing list, and Accept.
Manager
4.Drawing
project.
Accept.
97
________________
view.
98
Define the views to be used in the

composite drawing view:
1. Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject drawing views for the composite
drawing view.
You can define the views in one of two ways:
By specifying the volumes of the drawing views in the model design file (as
specified in the earlier example). When you do this, you are specifying the
clipping volume.
By specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model.
The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.
Manager
4.Drawing
To define the views by specifying the
clipping volume:
1. Key in all six coordinate values in the Drawing View Volume field for the first drawing
view to be used in the composite drawing view, then Accept.
2. Key in coordinate values for each drawing view to be used in the composite drawing
view, then Accept. You can define up to ten views to be used in the composite drawing
view.
The Drawing Views field displays the drawing views as they are
defined. Each time a drawing view volume for a drawing view is
defined, the system automatically updates this field.
3. After all of the drawing views are defined, exit the form.
99
________________
4. Confirm the form that appears, and the system updates the database.
To define the views by specifying a saved

view:
The saved views must already exist.
1. Select Saved View.
2. Select the discipline of the drawing view to be added, and Accept.
3. Select the area that contains the saved view, and Accept.
4. Select the model with the saved view to be used, and Accept.
5. Select the saved view to be used to define the clipping volume of the drawing view, and
Accept.
6. Continue to define the additional saved views that are to be used in the composite
drawing view, then Accept. You can define up to ten views to be used in the composite
drawing view.
7. After all of the drawing views are defined, Acceptthe form.
The system updates the database.
8. Exit the form that appears.
100
Attach the drawing view models, and

complete the composite drawing view:
1. Select the discipline and Accept.
2. Select the area to attach to the drawing view or the area that contains the models to be
attached (or toggle Select Models to Select Area to attach all models in that area), then
Accept.
3. If you did not toggle to Select Area, select the model to be used to attach the drawing
view, then Accept.
4. If there are more reference files to attach, continue this same process. Otherwise, exit.
Manager
4.Drawing
101
________________
4.4 Revise Options

This command activates the Revise Options form. It is used to revise the database
information for an existing drawing and drawing view and for the drawing file.
Commands
Revise Drawing Revise drawing attributes.
Revise Drawing View Revise drawing view attributes and the drawing file.
Steps
1. Select the Revise option from the Drawing Manager form.
The system displays the Revise Options form.
2. Select one of the Revise options.
For each Revise option, the system displays the available Drawing types (defined in
Standard Note 2000) in a display list.
102
________________ Revise Options
Select the type of drawing to use from the display list, and select Accept to continue.
The system displays the associated Revise form for the selected drawing type.
OR
Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Manager form.
Manager
4.Drawing
103
________________
4.4.1 Revise Drawing

This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It is used to revise the definition of an
existing drawing. It also changes the database attributes associated with a specified drawing.
First, the system displays the Drawing Number display list, and it then displays the Revise
Drawing form which revises an existing drawing.
Field Descriptions
Drawing Number Place a data point in the field and delete the current number, then
key in the new drawing number. You can key in up to 24 characters to change the
drawing number.
Drawing Name Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then key
in the new drawing name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the drawing
name.
Completion Status Place a data point in the field and key in a number for the
percentage complete.
Default Scale Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and select
from the available scale values to change the current displayed drawing scale.
Last Revision Number This field displays the current revision number of the
drawing. This field cannot be edited by the user.
Revision Number Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revision

of the drawing. This field is optional.
Revised By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who

revised the drawing. This field is optional.
104
________________ Revise Drawing
Checked By Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who

checked the drawing. This field is optional.
Revision Description Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide a

description of this revision of the drawing. This field is optional.
Do Not Load Title Block / Load Title Block Set this toggle to Load Title Block if
you want the revisions being made to be reflected on the title block before the drawing
is approved. If you select Do Not Load Title Block, you can still load this information
to the title block when the drawing is approved using the Approve Drawing command.
Steps
1. Select the Revise Drawing option from the Revise Options form.
The system displays the Drawing Types.
2. Accept or Select Option or Drawing Type
Select a drawing type from the display list, and select Accept.
The system activates the Select Drawing form with a list of all of the drawings defined
for the project.
3. Select Drawing
Select the drawing to be revised, and select Accept.
The system displays the Revise Drawing form with the current attribute values for the
specified drawing.
Manager
4.Drawing
4. Select Attribute for Revision
Place a data point in the fields and modify the necessary attributes.
5. If revision management will be used, key in the revision management data.
6. Accept the drawing revisions.
The system updates the database, and returns to the Select Drawing form. The form is
updated to reflect the revisions made to the drawing attributes.
7. You can select another drawing, or select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise
Options form.
105
________________
4.4.2 Revise Drawing View

This option activates the Revise Drawing View form. It is used to revise the definition of an
existing drawing view. It also changes the database attributes associated with a specified
drawing view. First, the system displays the Drawing Number display list as shown on the
left. After a drawing has been selected and confirmed, the system displays the Revise
Drawing View form which revises an existing drawing as shown on the right. This form may
be used to modify the model category data, change the clipping volume and orientation, and
define reference model attachments for a drawing view.
The system automatically defines a display depth large enough to display the
drawing view graphics.
Commands
Revise Drawing View Data Revises the drawing view attributes. The operator
sequence for this option varies, depending on the view selected. If a composite drawing
view is selected, you can modify each view within the drawing view.
Revise Orientation Revises the viewing direction of the drawing view.
Reference Models Revises or reviews the reference model attachments.
Steps
1. Select Option
Select the Revise Drawing View option from the Revise Options form.
The system activates the Drawing Types display list.
106
________________ Revise Drawing View
2. Accept Or Select Option or Drawing Type
The system displays a list of all the drawings defined for the project.
3. Select Drawing
Select the drawing to be revised, and select Accept.
The system displays a list of the available drawing views for the selected drawing.
4. Select Drawing View
Select the View Number to be revised.
5. Select the Revise Drawing View Data option to change the drawing view attributes.
The operator sequence for this option varies depending on the view selected. If a
composite drawing view is selected, you can modify each view within the drawing
view. Refer to Revise Drawing View Data, page 108 or Revise Composite Drawing
View Data, page 111 for more information.
OR
Select the Revise Orientation option to change the viewing direction of the drawing
view. Refer to Revise Orientation, page 115 for more information.
OR
Select the Reference Models option to revise or review the reference model
Manager
4.Drawing
attachments. Refer to Reference Models, page 117 for more information.
107
________________
4.4.2.1 Revise Drawing View Data

This option activates the Revise Drawing View Data form. It is used to modify the drawing
view number, name, scale or clipping volume information.
Field Descriptions
View Number Place a data point in the field and delete the current number, then key
in the new view number. You can key in up to six characters to change the view
number.
View Name Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then key in
the new view name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the view name.
View Scale Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and select
from the available scale values to change the current displayed drawing view scale.
English Units - m m"=n n" where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale on
the model. For example, 1/4"=1 indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1
foot in the model. The scale factors are stored in the Standard Note Library.
OR
108
________________ Revise Drawing View Data
Metric Units - n:nn where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on the
the model.
Drawing View Volume Place a data point in the field and key in modifications to
the clipping volume for the specified drawing view.
Commands
coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. The match lines will be placed at
the clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will
be placed parallel to each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing
views.
Manager
4.Drawing
level = 62
color = 0 (white)
weight = 0 line style = 0
109
________________
Steps
1. Select the Revise Drawing View Data option and a drawing view from the Revise
Drawing View form.
The system activates the Revise Drawing View Data form with the current values filled
in for the specified drawing view.
3. Accept the specified revisions.
The system processes the data, and updates the database. When the view scale is
revised, the system revises the scale in the Drawing View Database Table so that any
drawing view scale displayable attribute labels in the drawing for this drawing view
can be updated.
If the drawing view is composed, the drawing graphics will be updated.
4. Select Cancel to exit the form and return to the Revise Drawing View form.
You can revise additional information for the specified view by selecting another option
on the Revise Drawing View form. Refer to Revise Orientation, page 115 or Reference
Models, page 117 for more information.
110
________________ Revise Composite Drawing View Data
4.4.2.2 Revise Composite Drawing View Data

This option activates the Revise Composite Drawing View Data form. It is used to modify
the composite drawing view number, name, scale, and orientation. You can also modify the
clipping volume by modifying individual drawing views within the composite drawing view.
Commands
Redefine Individual Views Redefines the individual drawing views within the
composite drawing view. See Redefine Individual Views, page 113 for more
information.
Orientation Defines the drawing view orientation.
Manager
4.Drawing
Field Descriptions
Composite View Number Place a data point in the field and delete the current
number, then key in the new view number. You can key in up to six characters to
change the composite view number.
Composite View Name Place a data point in the field and delete the current name,
then key in the new view name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the
composite view name.
Composite View Scale Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list,
and select from the available scale values to change the current displayed composite
view scale.
111
________________
Steps
1. Select Revise Drawing View Data and a composite drawing view from the Revise
Drawing View form.
The system activates the Revise Drawing View Data form with the current values filled
in for the specified composite drawing view.
3. Select a new drawing view Orientation if necessary.
4. Accept the specified revisions.
OR
Select the Redefine Individual Views option to modify the individual drawing views
within the composite drawing view. See the Redefine Individual Views section for more
information.
THEN
5. Accept all of the specified views for the composite drawing view being revised. The
system revises the composite drawing view in the database and updates the drawing
view in the drawing.
112
________________ Redefine Individual Views
4.4.2.2.1 Redefine Individual Views

This option activates the Redefine Individual Views field, which is used to revise individual
views in a composite drawing view.
Commands
Saved View Uses a saved view model to redefine the orientation and clipping
volume of the drawing view.
Reject View Deletes as many of the individual views from the composite drawing
view as specified.
Field Descriptions
Manager
4.Drawing
this field.
Drawing View Volume Redefines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation
Redefines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second
point.
113
________________
Steps
1. Select the Redefine Individual Views option to modify the individual drawing views
within the composite drawing view.
The system displays the Redefine Individual Views form.
2. Select the drawing view to be revised.
THEN
Specify Clipping Volume
The system automatically defines a display depth large enough to

display the drawing view graphics.
Key in all of the Drawing View Volume coordinates as follows to define the individual
drawing views for the composite drawing view.
OR
Select the Saved View option to use a model saved view to define the clipping volume
for a drawing view. See Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View, page 94
3. Accept the displayed values to define a view.
The system updates the Drawing Views field with the view information, and clears the
Drawing View Volume block for the next view definition.
4. Select a drawing view and select the Reject View to delete the view from the selected
5. Repeat the steps 2 through 3 to specify the individual clipping volume coordinates to be
used in the next view. You can specify as many as ten views.
6. Accept the displayed clipping volume values for each drawing view, and select Cancel
to exit the Drawing View Volume field.
114
________________ Revise Orientation
4.4.2.3 Revise Orientation

This option activates the Revise Orientation form. It is used to revise the viewing direction
for the active drawing view.
Commands
Orientation Defines the drawing view orientation with one of the seven standard
orientation buttons.
Rotated View Defines the drawing view orientation that does not apply to one of the
seven standard orientations.
The Rotated View option will not work on skewed drawing views.
Manager
4.Drawing
Field Descriptions
View Number Displays the currently selected view number.
View Name Displays the currently selected view name.
Steps
1. Select the Revise Orientation option from the Revise Drawing View form to change
the viewing direction of the specified drawing view.
The system activates the Revise Orientation form with the current drawing view data
displayed, and the active orientation for the specified drawing view is highlighted.
115
________________
2. Select Drawing View Orientation
The system automatically defines a display depth large enough to

display the drawing view graphics.
Select one of the standard orientations to specify the new orientation. Go to Step 4.
OR
Select the Rotated View orientation to display an orientation that does not apply to one
of the seven standard orientations.
The system displays the rotate options.
3. Select the Model Axis and key in the degrees to rotate about that axis.
4. Accept the new orientation.
Following successful completion, the system displays the message Updated

Orientation.
Select Cancel to exit the form and return to the Revise Drawing View form.
You can revise additional information for the specified view by selecting one of the
other options on the Revise Drawing View form. Refer to Reference Models, page 117
or Revise Drawing View Data, page 108 for more information.
116
________________ Reference Models
4.4.2.4 Reference Models

This option activates the Reference Models form. It is used to copy and attach reference
models and add, remove, and review reference model categories.
Commands
Display / Snap / Locate These toggles set the Display, Snap, and Locate features
to either ON or OFF. These options are only valid for composed drawing views, and
they only appear when a reference model is selected from the list.
Display On / Off controls whether or not the selected reference model(s) will display
on the screen and on plotted drawings.
Manager
4.Drawing
Snap On / Off controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selected
reference model(s).
Locate On / Off controls whether or not the user can copy database information from
the reference model(s) into the active file.
Apply to Active / Discipline / All Assigns the Display, Snap, and Locate toggle
settings to either the active drawing view only, or to all drawing views in the same
discipline as the active drawing view, or to all possible drawing views in all disciplines.
Copy From Active Drawing Copies reference model attachments from the
drawing view in the active drawing.
Copy From Another Drawing Copies reference model attachments from any
drawing view in the project.
Attach Model Attaches reference models to a specified drawing view.
117
________________
Detach Model Removes the reference file from a specified drawing view (deletes
the reference model entry in the drawing view table).
Auto Attach/Verify Automatically attaches reference files for the active drawing
view, and displays a list of all models in the project that are within the range of the
selected drawing view volume.
Field Descriptions
Disc/Model Name This field displays a list of models that are attached to the
selected drawing view.
Steps
1. Select Reference Models from the Revise Drawing View form.
The system displays the Reference Models form.
2. Select one of the options to change the reference model attachments for the selected
drawing view.
118
________________ Copy From Active Drawing
4.4.2.4.1 Copy From Active Drawing

This option activates the Drawing View Selection form. It is used to copy reference model
attachments from the specified active drawing view. First, the system displays the Drawing
View Selection list. After a drawing view is selected and accepted, the system then displays
the Copy Drawing View Attachments form which allows you to copy models from the
Commands
Select Another View Activates the Drawing View Selection form so that you can
select another view from which to copy reference model attachments.
Manager
4.Drawing
Field Descriptions
Drawing View Number Displays the drawing view numbers for the active drawing
on the Drawing View Selection form.
Drawing Number Displays the active drawing number on the Drawing View
Selection form.
Discipline/Model Name Displays the discipline and model name of the models
available in the selected drawing view on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form.
Drawing Number Displays the active drawing number on the Copy Drawing View
Attachments form.
Drawing View Number Displays the selected drawing view number on the Copy
Drawing View Attachments form.
119
________________
Steps
1. Select the Copy From Active Drawing option from the Reference Models form.
The system displays the Drawing View Selection form with a list of drawing views for
active drawing.
Select the drawing view that contains the reference model attachments to be copied, and
Accept the drawing view. The system activates the Copy Drawing View Attachments
form with a list of any reference model attachments for the selected drawing view.
3. Select Model
Select the reference model to copy, and Accept the specified model.
Following successful completion, the system displays the message Drawing View
Attachment Copy Completed.
4. You can select the Select Another View option to reactivate the Drawing View
Selection form to select another view from which to copy reference model attachments.
OR
Select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Drawing View form.
120
________________ Copy From Another Drawing
4.4.2.4.2 Copy From Another Drawing

This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It allows you to copy reference model
attachments from any drawing view in the project. First, the Drawing Types list displays.
After a drawing type is selected and accepted, the Drawing Selection list displays which
allows you to define models from a specific drawing model.
After a drawing is selected and accepted, the Drawing View Selection list displays. After a
drawing view is selected and accepted, the Copy Drawing View Attachments list displays
which allows you to copy models from the selected drawing views.
Manager
4.Drawing
Field Descriptions
121
________________
Attachments form.
Steps
1. Select the Copy From Another Drawing option from the Reference Models form.
The system displays the Drawing Selection form with a Drawing Types display list.
2. Select Drawing Type
Select the type of drawing to use, and select Accept.
The system activates the Drawing Selection form with Drawing Number display list.
3. Select Drawing
Select the drawing to use, and select Accept.
The system activates the Drawing View Selection form with a list of drawing views in
the selected drawing.
Select the drawing view that contains the reference model attachments to be copied, and
select Accept.
The system activates the Copy Drawing View Attachments form with a
Discipline/Model Name display list of all reference model attachments for the
specified drawing view.
122
________________ Copy From Another Drawing
5. Select Model
Select the reference models to be copied, and select Accept.
Following successful completion, the system displays the message Drawing View
Attachment Copy Completed.
6. You can select the Select Another View option to reactivate the Drawing View
Selection form to select another view from which to copy reference model attachments.
OR
Select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Drawing View form.
Manager
4.Drawing
123
________________
4.4.2.4.3 Attach Model

This option activates a Discipline display list. It is used to attach reference models to
specified drawing views.
Steps
1. Select the Attach Model option from the Reference Models form.
The system displays the Discipline display list.
2. Select Discipline or Exit
Select a discipline, and select Accept.
The system displays the Reference Models display list.
124
________________ Attach Model
3. Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model files for a specified area, or to
Select Models to specify the individual reference models to be attached.
THEN
Select the area to attach to the drawing view, or the area that contains the models to
attach.
The system attaches all models in the selected area when the toggle is set to Attach by
Area. Go to Step 5.
The system displays a list of models for the drawing view when the toggle is set to
Select Models.
4. Select Model
Manager
4.Drawing
The system uses the default model data categories defined using the
Project Setup command to determine which categories are displayed in
the models selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays all
categories.
Select the model(s) to attach to the drawing view.
5. Select Accept.
The system updates the database, displays a message indicating that the reference
model is being attached, and returns to the list of areas for another selection.
Select Cancel to exit the form and return to the Revise Drawing form.
125
________________
4.4.2.4.4 Detach Model

This option detaches selected reference model attachments from a specified drawing view.
Steps
1. Select the Detach Model option from the Reference Models form.
The system activates a list of models for the specified drawing view.
2. Select Model
Select the reference model(s) to be detached from the active drawing view.
The system highlights the selected reference model(s).
3. Accept or Select Additional Models
Accept the highlighted reference models as the models to be detached, or select another
model.
The system detaches the selected reference model(s) from the drawing view and updates
the Disc/Model Name display list.
OR
Select Cancel to exit the form or select another option without detaching the reference
model.
126
________________ Auto Attach/Verify
4.4.2.4.5 Auto Attach/Verify

Selecting this option activates the All Disciplines / Pre-Defined Disciplines toggle and the
Propagated / Sparse Models toggle.
The All Disciplines / Pre-Defined Disciplines toggle is used to automatically attach reference
files to the active drawing view from all disciplines or from pre-defined disciplines. It
displays all the models within the project that have elements within the clipping volume of the
active drawing view.
The Propagated / Sparse Models toggle is only applicable for sites using the ModelDraft
product. This toggle is used to limit the Automatic Attach / Verify form to show only
propagated or sparse models in the reference model display list. Propagated and sparse
models cannot be attached simultaneously, unless propagated and sparse graphics are included
in the same model.
Manager
4.Drawing
When the toggles are set and the form is confirmed, the system displays the Automatic
Attach / Verify form and highlights the reference models which are already attached. This
form is used to attach additional models.
127
________________
Commands
All Disciplines / Pre-Defined Disciplines The Pre-Defined Disciplines setting
filters the reference models by the discipline defined for the drawing type using the
Project Setup command. The All Disciplines setting displays all reference models in the
drawing view volume selected regardless of the discipline.
Propagated / Sparse Models Only applicable for projects using ModelDraft, this
toggle limits the Automatic Attach / Verify form to show only propagated or sparse
models in the reference model display list. Propagated and sparse models cannot be
attached simultaneously, unless propagated and sparse graphics are included in the
same model.
Disc/Model Name Displays a list of the currently attached models on the Reference
Models form.
Disc/Area Number Displays a list of the available models on the Automatic

Attachment/Verify in either the entire project or that are in the pre-defined disciplines,
depending on the toggle setting.
Steps
1. Select the Auto Attach/Verify option from the Reference Models form.
The system activates a Pre-Defined Disciplines and a Propagated Models toggle.
2. Set the Pre-Defined Disciplines toggle to see the filtered or non-filtered list of models,
and set the Propagated Models toggle to see the propagated or sparse models, then
select Accept.
128
________________ Auto Attach/Verify
The system activates the Automatic Attachment/Verify form. It also displays the
messages Forming Reference File List and then the message Select Model.
3. Select the models from the displayed reference file list. (Models that are already
attached will already be highlighted.)
4. Accept or Select Additional Models
Highlight the reference models as the models to be attached and select Accept to
continue.
The system displays the message Attaching Reference Model and returns to the
Drawing View Ref Model Attachments form.
OR
Select Cancel to exit the form without attaching the reference model.
Manager
4.Drawing
129
________________
4.5 Delete Options

This option activates the Delete Options form. It is used to delete an existing drawing or
drawing view from the project. When a Delete option is selected, the Drawing Types display
list will activate.
Commands
Delete Drawing Deletes a drawing.
Delete Drawing View Deletes a drawing view.
Steps
1. Select the Delete options from the Drawing Manager form.
The system displays the Delete Options form.
2. Select one of the Delete options.
For each of the Delete options, the system displays the available Drawing Types in the
display list.
The system displays the associated delete form for the selected drawing type.
130
________________ Delete Drawing
4.5.1 Delete Drawing

This option displays the Drawing Number display list. It is used to specify a drawing file to
be deleted from the project.
Steps
1. Select Delete Drawing and the drawing type to be deleted and select Accept.
The system activates the Delete Drawing form with a Drawing Number display list.
2. Select Drawing
Select the drawing to be deleted, and select Accept.
Manager
4.Drawing
The system deletes the drawing in the database and its associated design file and
updates the Delete Drawing form to reflect the current list of drawings for the project.
Delete additional drawings by selecting another drawing.
3. Select Cancel to return to the Delete Options form.
131
________________
4.5.2 Delete Drawing View

This option activates the Drawing Number display list.
When a drawing is selected and confirmed, the Delete Drawing View form is activated. It is
used to delete a drawing view or composite drawing view.
Steps
1. Select Delete Drawing View and select the drawing type of the drawing view to be
deleted and select Accept.
The system activates the Select Drawing form with a Drawing Number display list.
2. Select Drawing
132
________________ Delete Drawing View
Select the drawing containing the drawing view(s) to be deleted, and select Accept.
The system activates the Delete Drawing View form with a Drawing View display list.
Select the view to be deleted, and select Accept.
The system deletes the drawing view from the database and updates the Delete
Drawing View form to reflect the current drawing view data.
You can delete additional drawing views by selecting another drawing view number.
4. Select Cancel to return to the Delete Options form.
Manager
4.Drawing
133
________________
4.6 Report - Drawing Management Data

This option produces a Drawing Management Data Report on all the drawings associated with
a project. It creates a report named drawing_report in the project directory.
Steps
1. Select Report - Drawing Management Data from the Drawing Manager form.
Creating Drawing Management Data Report
The system creates the report in the project directory.
Drawing Management Report has been Created
Sample Report
Drawing Management Data Report
Date : 18-Sep-97
Time : 12:24:06
Project Number : stdeng_o43

Project Name : Standard English
Job Number : 1234
Company Name : Created on 6.2
Plant Name : Intergraph Corporation
Drawing Type: Foundation Location Drawings A

Drawing : 00FD0102 Area 40 Fondation Location Plan 3/8"=1 D
00fd0102.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
134
________________ Report - Drawing Management Data
Drawing : 40FL0101 Area 40 Foundation Locations 3/8"=1 D

40fl0101.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing Type: Piling Drawings A

Drawing : bctest dssds 3/8"=1 D
bctest.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing Type: Plot Plans A
Drawing : 311 test drawing #311 1/4"=1 D

311.dgn plot1 c:\plot\
Drawing : 311 variation test drawing #311A 1/4"=1 D

311variat.dgn plot2 c:\plot\
Drawing Type: Equipment Arrangement Drawings A
Drawing : drwX drawing 311 from Omaha, NE 3/8"=1 C

drwx.dgn drwmgt c:\draw\user\
Drawing:train.1 Training 1: RLH 3/16"=1 B

train.1.dgn rlh123 c:\rlhcert\dwg\
Drawing : train.2 Training 2: RLH 3/16"=1 B

Drawing : train.3 Training 3: RLH 3/16"=1 B

Drawing : train.X Train 4 3/16"=1 B

train.x.dgn rlh123 c:\rlhcert\dwg\
Manager
4.Drawing
Drawing Type: Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections & Details A
Drawing : 40PPSD001 Area 40 Title Block Test 3/8"=1 D

40ppsd001.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : 40pd0101 Area 40 Piping Plan 3/8"=1 D

40pd0101.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : 40ppsd101 Title Block Test 3/8"=1 D

40ppsd101.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : bcdraw test drawings 3/8"=1 E

bcdraw.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : lctest test for symbology 1/4"=1 A

lctest.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : test2 test dwg 1/4"=1 B

test.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
135
________________
Drawing : vhl2_0 testing of VHL version 2.0 3/8"=1 D

vhl2_0.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
Drawing : wwdraw1 Documentation Drawing 3/8"=1 B

wwdraw1.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\
136
________________ Report Models Form
4.7 Report Models Form

This command activates the Report Models form. This form is used to generate reports from
the models within the drawing with the report definition data. The Drawing Report
Manager stores the report record and location records for each discrimination data file and
format file in the Project Control Database. The numbered records are used to locate ASCII
files on their specified nodes.
Manager
4.Drawing
Each report is based on only one drawing, with only one view in that drawing.
Multiple drawings can be reported on in batch mode by creating multiple
discrimination data sets.
137
________________
Options
Report Format Displays the Report Format form, which you can use to create,
revise, copy, or delete the record of a format file (not the format file). For more
information, see Report Format Form, page 141.
Report Discrimination Data Displays the Discrimination Data form, which you
can use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a discrimination data file as well
as the file itself. For more information, see Discrimination Data Form, page 147.
Report Displays the Report form, which you can use to create, revise, delete, and
approve report records and report files. For more information, see Report Form, page
173.
Report Management Data Displays the Report Management Defaults form,

which you can use to create a record in the project control database of the default
nodename and path for the report definition files. This option is primarily used for
setup. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 188.
138
________________ Using the Report Commands
4.7.1 Using the Report Commands
Understanding Report Files and Records

The Drawing Report Manager uses the discrimination data files, format files, and database
records that represent these files to generate reports. The following definitions explain all of
the files and records in the reporting process.
Format File and Record

The format file is a user-defined, ASCII file which must be created with a text editor outside
of the Drawing Report Manager. It contains special indices identifying what data appears in
the report and how the data is sorted. It also defines how the data is formatted in the report.
Without the format file(s), Drawing Report Manager reports cannot be processed. A set of
basic format files is delivered for each type of reporting.
Using the Report Format option, you can create a numbered record for each format file so
that it can be accessed for report processing. The format record is a record in the Project
Control Database used to name and locate a specific format file. Unlike the format file, the
format record is created interactively. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that
is used for report processing but is not an actual file.
Discrimination Data File and Record

The discrimination data file limits the report to only the specified database occurrences. It is
an ASCII file that is created interactively using the Drawing Report Manager.
Manager
4.Drawing
The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and
locate a specific discrimination data file. There is a uniquely-numbered record for each
discrimination data file so that it can be accessed for report processing. This is the same way
that the format record is used to access a format file.
139
________________
Report Output and Record

The Drawing Report Manager creates a report using the specified format, discrimination,
and search criteria data files, and places it in the specified directory on the specified node.
The report record names or defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate a
report, including the report output. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is
used for report processing but is not an actual file.)
Group Workflow
There is a definite workflow for at least the first time you create a report. First, use the
Report Management Data option to specify defaults for the nodename and path of the report
definition files. By defining the defaults first, you can prevent keying in a nodename and path
on each form. If you want to use a different nodename or path than the defined default,
simply place a data point in that field and key in the modification.
The following steps can be done in any order: create your format record, discrimination data
record, and discrimination data file using the Report Format and Report Discrimination
Data options. Reports cannot be generated until the format file, the discrimination data file,
and their corresponding records have been established.
Finally, use the Report option to create the actual report.
140
________________ Report Format Form
4.8 Report Format Form

When you choose the Report Format option from the Report Manager form, the Report
Format form is displayed.
This form enables you to create, copy, revise, or delete a record of the location of the format
file in the project control database. An option is also provided that enables you to copy a
record and its corresponding ASCII format files.
Manager
4.Drawing
The format file defines the data that will be reported and the way in which that data will be
displayed. Reports cannot be generated unless a format file exists and a record of the files
location has been entered into the project control database.
Options
Create Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which enables you to add a
new record of a format file in the project control database. For more information, see
Format Creation/Revision Form, page 143.
Copy Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which copies the record of an
existing format file from the project control database along with the corresponding
ASCII format file. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page
143.
Revise Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which modifies a record of an

existing format file in the project control database. For more information, see Format
Creation/Revision Form, page 143.
141
________________
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing record of a format file
from the project control database. If the record of the format file is deleted, reporting
cannot be performed. For more information, see Format Deletion Form, page 145.
142
________________ Format Creation/Revision Form
4.8.1 Format Creation/Revision Form

When you choose Create, Copy, or Revise from the Report Format form, the Format
Creation/Revision form is displayed.
This form creates or revises a record in the project control database; this record defines the
location of a format file. The format file itself defines the contents and format of the report.
Both the location specification and the format file must exist to report on PDS data.
Manager
4.Drawing
Field Descriptions
Number A unique number of up to 24 characters. Specifies the short name in the
project control database used to identify the record of the format file.
Description A description of up to 40 characters for the format file.
File Specification The file name of the format file to reference.
Path The disk location of the format file. This field retains the active setting.
Node The nodename of the system on which the format file is located. This field
retains the active setting.
143
________________
Before Using this Form

You must have created an ASCII format file. A set of basic format files is delivered with the
PD_Report product in the win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format directory. The file for
MTO reporting is named piping_#.fmt.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Create, Copy, or Revise.
A list of available records displays for copy or revision. To create a database record,
go to Step 3.
2. Select Report Format
From the displayed list, select the record to be copied or revised. Then click Accept.
Key-in fields are displayed for you to specify the required database information.
3. Specify Report Format Data
Type information in each of the displayed fields, taking care to press return in each
field. Then click Accept.
The project control database is updated.
144
________________ Format Deletion Form
4.8.2 Format Deletion Form

When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.
This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete
the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records,
discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database
records.
Manager
4.Drawing
Fields and Options
Number/Description Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character
description of a report record in the project control database.
Delete File/Do Not Delete File Determines whether the associated file is deleted.
When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file.
When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.
Operating Sequence
From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.
145
________________
2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept.
The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.
146
________________ Discrimination Data Form
4.9 Discrimination Data Form

When you select Report Discrimination Data from the Report Manager form, the
Discrimination Data form is displayed.
This form creates, copies, revises, and deletes a discrimination data file from the specified
directory. The associated record in the project control database is also copied, revised, or
deleted as needed.
Manager
4.Drawing
A discrimination data file is an ASCII file that designates which models will be included in a
report. That is, discrimination data specifies the scope of the report. The project control
database record specifies the name and location of the discrimination data file that is to be
associated with a specific report.
Options
Create Displays the Discrimination Data Creation form, which creates a new
discrimination data file. The associated project control database record is also created.
Copy Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which copies an existing
data file. The associated project control database record is also copied.
Revise Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifies

discrimination data. You can use this option to revise the contents of the discrimination
data file, the location of the discrmination file, and the associated record in the project
control database.
147
________________
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes a discrimination data file as well
as its associated record in the project control database. For more information, see
Discrimination Data Deletion Form, page 162.
148
________________ Discrimination Data Creation Form
4.9.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form

When you choose Create from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination Data
Creation form is displayed.
This form creates a discrimination data file in a specified directory. It also creates a
corresponding record in the project control database. In addition, you can use this form to
specify segment and component search criteria.
If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify search
Manager
4.Drawing
criteria data using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified using
the Report Search Criteria option takes precedence.
Fields and Options

Drawing Number The drawing number of the active drawing.
Number The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of the
discrimination data record in the project control database.
Description The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record in

the project control database.
File Specification The file name of the discrimination data record to be created.
File Path The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the
active settings.
149
________________
File Node The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file is
located. This field retains the active settings.
Select Drawing View Displays a form which allows you to select a drawing view
based on the active drawing.
Segment Search Criteria Displays the Search Criteria form, which defines the
segment search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria -
Piping Segment Form, page 153.
Component Search Criteria Displays the Component Search Criteria form,

which defines the component search criteria for the report. For more information, see
Search Criteria - Component Form, page 157.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Create
The Discrimination Data Creation form is displayed.
2. Specify Discrimination Data
In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, and
node.
3. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Then click
Accept.
After including any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file,
be sure to click the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms while
specifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even though
you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the
discrimination data file is not actually created until you click Accept on the
Report Discrimination Data form.
150
________________ Discrimination Data Revision Form
4.9.2 Discrimination Data Revision Form

When you choose Copy or Revise from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination
Data Revision form is displayed.
This form revises an existing discrimination data file. It also copies an existing discrimination
data file; you can then use the revision options to modify the copy as needed. The
corresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed.
In addition, options are provided for you to modify segment and component search criteria
data.
If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify search
criteria data using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified using
the Report Search Criteria option takes precedence.
Fields and Options
Manager
4.Drawing
Drawing Number The drawing number of the active drawing.
discrimination data record in the project control database.
Description The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record in

the project control database.
File Specification The file name of the discrimination data record to be created.
File Path The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the
active settings.
File Node The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file is
151
________________
Select Drawing View Displays a form which allows you to select a drawing view
based on the active drawing.

Delete Views Displays a form which allows you to select a drawing view based on
the active drawing.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Copy or Revise.
The Discrimination Data Revision form is displayed.
node.
Accept.
After updating any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file,
you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the
discrimination data file is not actually updated until you click Accept on the
Report Discrimination Data form.
152
________________ Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form
4.9.2.1 Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form

When you choose Segment Search Criteria from the Discrimination Data Creation form
or from the Discrimination Data Revision form, the Search Criteria - Piping Segment
form is displayed.
This form specifies which segment attributes are to be reported on. The most commonly
reported attributes are available as form options, but you are not restricted to those options.
To display all available attributes, click Other.
Manager
4.Drawing
153
________________
When you select an attribute, applicable operator options are displayed along the bottom of
the form.
The combination of these operators with either attribute values or (where applicable) code list
values enables you to fully specify an attribute restriction (for example, fluid code = AC).
You can combine these specifications as needed using the And and Or options, which are
displayed in place of the operator options after you have defined a segment attribute
restriction.
When you select a code-listed attribute, the Review Standard Notes form is
displayed. This form provides a list of valid codes for the specified attribute.
Simply select a code from the list and click Accept to continue with the
specification.
When you are using this form to copy and/or revise an existing discrimination data file,
additional options are provided for you to insert, remove, or clear search criteria
specifications.
154
________________ Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form
Fields and Options

Piping Segment Displays the restricted segment attributes once they have been
defined.
Unit Number Restricts the reported segments by means of the unit number attribute.
Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
Fluid Code Restricts the reported segments by means of the fluid code attribute.
Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.
Unit Code Restricts the reported segments by means of the unit code attribute.
Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
Line Sequence Number Restricts the reported segments by means of the line
sequence number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete
the specification.
Nominal Piping Diameter Restricts the reported segments by means of the nominal
piping diameter attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete
the specification.
Piping Materials Class Restricts the reported segments by means of the piping
materials class attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete
the specification.
Line ID Restricts the reported segments by means of the line ID attribute. Select an
operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
Insulation Purpose Restricts the reported segments by means of the insulation

purpose attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.
Manager
4.Drawing
Heat Tracing Requirement Restricts the reported segments by means of the heat
tracing requirement attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the
specification.
Train Number Restricts the reported segments by means of the train number
attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.
Construction Status Restricts the reported segments by means of the construction

status attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.
Approval Status Restricts the reported segments by means of the approval status
attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.
Other Displays a list of all available attributes.
Brief List Updates the form to display the attribute options.
155
________________
Insert Search Definition Displays the And and Or options to add search criteria to
the specification.
Remove Search Definition Removes a selected line from the defined search criteria.
To remove a line, click Remove Search Definition, select the line to be removed, and
click Accept.
Clear Search Criteria Removes the complete search criteria specification. Select
this option and click Accept to remove the defined set of search criteria.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Segment Search Criteria.
The Search Criteria - Piping Segment form is displayed.
2. Select Attribute
Select an attribute to be restricted.
The available operator options are displayed.
3. Select Operator
Select an operator from the displayed options.
4. For code-listed attributes, select a value from the displayed list and click Accept. For
all other attributes, type an attribute value in the available field.
5. Use the And and Or options to specify additional restrictions as needed. Then click
Accept.
156
________________ Search Criteria - Component Form
4.9.2.2 Search Criteria - Component Form

When you choose Component Search Criteria from the Discrimination Data Creation
form or from the Discrimination Data Revision form, the Search Criteria - Component
form is displayed.
This form specifies which component attributes are restricted for the report. The default is no
search criteria (that is, no restrictions all component attributes are reported). The most
commonly reported component attributes are available as form options, but you are not
restricted to those options. To display additional attributes, grouped by entity, click Other.
Manager
4.Drawing
157
________________
Define all the common search criteria such as Commodity Code and
Fabrication Category before selecting the Other option. Once the Other
option is selected, the search criteria should be defined separately for each
category, such as Piping Component, Instrument Component,
Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support.
the form.
restriction.
When you select an entity grouping that includes the attribute you want to restrict, a list of
associated attributes is displayed.
158
When you select a code-listed attribute, the

Review Standard Notes form is displayed. This form provides a list of valid
codes for the specified attribute. Simply select a code from the list and click
Accept to continue with the specification.
specifications.
The search criteria defined through the Piping Component, Instrument

Component, Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support buttons will not be displayed
as a single list. To see the search criteria defined through these buttons, select
the appropriate button.
Fields and Options

Component Displays the restricted component attributes once they have been
defined.
Commodity Name Restricts the reported components by means of the commodity
Manager
4.Drawing
name attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the
specification.
Commodity Code Restricts the reported components by means of the commodity

code attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.
Fabrication Category Restricts the reported components by means of the

frabrication category attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the
specification.
Component Group Number Restricts the reported components by means of the

component group number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to
complete the specification.
Tag/Component Number Restricts the reported components by means of the

tag/component number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to
159
________________
Other Displays the entity options.
Piping Component Restricts the reported components by means of any of the

attributes that are associated with piping components. From the displayed list, select an
attribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a code
list value to complete the specification.
Instrument Component Restricts the reported components by means of any of the

attributes that are associated with instruments components. From the displayed list,
select an attribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select
a code list value to complete the specification.
Piping/Tubing Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes

that are associated with piping or tubing components. From the displayed list, select an
Pipe Support Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes
that are associated with pipe support attributes. From the displayed list, select an
Clear ALL Component Search Criteria Deletes the restricted component

attributes once they have been defined.
the specification.
click Accept.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Component Search Criteria.
The Search Criteria - Component form is displayed.
2. Select Attribute
3. Select Operator
160
Accept.
Manager
4.Drawing
161
________________
4.9.3 Discrimination Data Deletion Form

records.
Fields and Options

Operating Sequence
162
________________ Discrimination Data Deletion Form
Manager
4.Drawing
163
________________
4.10 Search Criteria Data Form

When you select Report Search Criteria from the Report Manager form, the Search
Criteria Data form is displayed.
Use this form to create, copy, revise, or delete report search criteria. Search criteria data
determines and reduces the amount of data reported by restricting the reporting of certain
attributes. Rather than report all data in a model, search criteria specifications narrow the
report to return only data that matches certain criteria.
You can specify search criteria as you create the discrimination data file; the options on the
Search Criteria Data form create the same data as a separate step. If you specify search
criteria data as you create the discrimination data file and by means of the Report Search
Criteria form, the specifications defined using the Report Search Criteria take precedence
when the report is generated.
Options
Create Displays the Search Criteria Data Creation form, which adds a new record
of a report search criteria file in the project control database. For more information, see
Search Criteria Data Creation Form, page 166.
Copy Displays the Search Criteria Data File Revision form, which copies the
record of an existing report search criteria file from the project control database and
copies the corresponding data file. For more information, see Search Criteria Data
Revision Form, page 169.
164
________________ Search Criteria Data Form
Revise Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifies an

existing record of a report search criteria file in the project control database. For more
information, see Search Criteria Data Revision Form, page 169.
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report search criteria
data file as well as its associated record in the project control database. For more
information, see Search Criteria Deletion Form, page 171.
Manager
4.Drawing
165
________________
4.10.1 Search Criteria Data Creation Form

When you choose Create from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria Data
This form creates a report search criteria data file in a specified directory. It also creates a
corresponding record in the project control database.
If you specify search criteria using both this form and the search criteria
options when you create the discrimination data, the search criteria specified
on this form (Search Criteria Data Creation) takes precedence.
Fields and Options

search criteria data file record in the project control database.
Description The description, up to 40 characters, of the search criteria data file

record in the project control database.
File Specification The file name (up to 14 characters) of the search criteria data file
to be created.
File Path The disk location of the search criteria data file. This field retains the
active settings.
166
________________ Search Criteria Data Creation Form
File Node The nodename of the system on which the search criteria data file is

Revise AND/OR Relation Displays a list of And/Or relationships.
Use this list to change the And/Or relationships between piping segment search criteria
(table 12, piping segment data) and the search criteria for the component data in table
34, piping component data; table 50, piping/tubing data; table 67, instrument
component data; and table 80, pipe support data.
Each category of component search criteria data is related to the piping segment search
criteria by a logical AND or a logical OR. By default, the logical relationship between
the piping segment search criteria and the four categories of component search criteria
is AND. This means that only components that meet the criteria defined for both sets of
criteria are reported.
Setting this relationship to OR increases the amount of data reported in that all
components that match either set of criteria are reported.
This is not an exclusive OR. With the OR setting, components that
Manager
4.Drawing
match both (or either) sets of criteria are reported.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Search Criteria Data form, click Create
The Search Criteria Data Creation form is displayed.
node.
Accept.
167
________________
After including any models or search criteria for the search criteria data file,
you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the search
criteria data file is not actually created until you click Accept on the Search
Criteria Data Creation form.
168
________________ Search Criteria Data Revision Form
4.10.2 Search Criteria Data Revision Form

When you choose Copy or Revise from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria
Data File Revision form is displayed.
This form revises an existing search criteria data file. It also copies an existing search criteria
Fields and Options


Manager
4.Drawing
File Specification The file name, up to 14 characters, of the search criteria file to be
created.
active settings.

Define Volume Displays the Volume Definition form, which specifies the
coordinates of a design volume cube for reporting. For more information, see The
Define Volume Form.
169
________________

Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Search Criteria form, select Copy or Revise.
The Search Criteria Data File Revision form is displayed, with a list of available data
files.
2. From the displayed list, select a data file to be copied or revised. Then click Accept.
node.
4. Select additional options as needed to define the report search criteria data. Then click
Accept.
170
________________ Search Criteria Deletion Form
4.10.3 Search Criteria Deletion Form

records.
Manager
4.Drawing
Fields and Options
Operating Sequence
171
________________
172
________________ Report Form
4.11 Report Form

When you select Report from the Report Manager form, the Report form is displayed.
This form creates, revises, and deletes report records and report files. A report record holds
specifications for a report; these specifications include the report name, the report description,
and which format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file to use to generate a
report.
Manager
4.Drawing
The report name is not the title that is printed on the report; the title is included
in the format file.
At the end of each report, a parameters page is included that contains the following
information:
Report Output The report number, report title, report creation/revision date, and
report node, path, and file name.
Format The report format number, description, and node, path, and file name.
Discrimination Data The report discrimination data number, description, and file
location (network address, path, and file name). The following discrimination data is
also included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search
criteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence.
Search Criteria The report search criteria number, description, and file location
(node, path, and file name. The following search criteria data is also included: list of
model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable),
and sorting sequence.
173
________________
Options
Create Displays the Report Creation form, which creates a report record and
generates a report. For more information, see Report Creation Form, page 175.
Revise Displays the Revise Report form, which regenerates a report from an
existing or revised report record. For more information, see Revise Report Form, page
178.
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report record and the
corresponding report. For more information, see Report Deletion Form, page 181.
Approve Displays the Report Approval form, which approves an existing report.
For more information, see Report Approval Form, page 183.
Multi-Create Displays the Report Multiple Submit form, which submits multiple
reports to the printer. For more information, see Report Multiple Submit Form, page
186.
174
________________ Report Creation Form
4.11.1 Report Creation Form

When you select Create from the Report form, the Report Creation form is displayed.
Use this form to create a report record and to generate a report. Because report records are
stored in the project control database, you can use them repeatedly as needed.
Fields and Options
Manager
4.Drawing
Report Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the
report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report
file short name.
Report Title The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not the
title in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the report
is contained in the format file.
Report File Spec The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters).
Report File Path The disk location for the report output file. This field retains the
active settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the
Report Management Dataform. For more information, see Report Management
Defaults Form, page 188.
Report Node The name of the system on which the report output file will be
located. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if you
have specified this data on the Report Management Data form. For more information,
see Report Management Defaults Form, page 188.
175
________________
Report Format File The name of the format file to be used to generate the active
report. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Select
the appropriate format file, and click Accept.
Report Discrimination File The name of the discrimination data file to be used to
generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discrimination
data files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept.
Report Search Criteria The name of the search criteria data file to be used to
generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteria
files is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept.
Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear a
specification, click Accept without selecting a file.
If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search
criteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in this
field, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field
takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination
data.
Revision Number The revision number (up to three characters) for the report.
Last Revision Number The revision number of the last report generated. This is a
read-only field; you cannot edit it.
Revised By The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field is
optional.
Revision Description The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision.

This field is optional.
Print/Delete Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then
deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print
queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it.
Print/Save Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the
report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is
displayed. Click on a queue to select it.
Save Saves the report output file without printing the report.
Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed Specifies when the report will be

processed. When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed, additional fields display
for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.
176
________________ Report Creation Form
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Create.
The Report Creation form is displayed.
2. Specify Report Data
Key in the report record information. Then select the appropriate report format file,
discrimination data file, and search criteria data file.
3. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be
printed.
4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later

(Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time
that the report is to be submitted.
5. Click Accept to save the report file.
Manager
4.Drawing
177
________________
4.11.2 Revise Report Form

When you select Revise from the Report form, the Revise Report form is displayed.
This form revises an existing report record and generates a report from the project control
database. An option is also provided to update (in some cases) the report record without
generating a report output file. Similarly, you can choose to generate an updated report output
file without updating the report record.
Fields and Options

file short name.
Report Title The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not the
title in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the report
is contained in the format file.
Report File Spec The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters).
Report File Path The disk location for the report output file. This field retains the
active settings.
Report Node The name of the system on which the report output file will be
Report Format File The name of the format file to be used to generate the active
report. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Select
the appropriate format file, and click Accept.
Report Discrimination File The name of the discrimination data file to be used to
generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discrimination
data files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept.
178
________________ Revise Report Form
Report Search Criteria The name of the search criteria data file to be used to
generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteria
files is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept.
Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear a
specification, click Accept without selecting a file.
If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search
criteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in this
field, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field
takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination
data.
Revision Number The revision number (up to three characters) for the report.
Last Revision Number The revision number of the last report generated. This is a
read-only field; you cannot edit it.
Revised By The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field is
optional.
Revision Description The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision.

This field is optional.
Manager
4.Drawing
Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch Specifies when the report

will be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additional
fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.
Revise Data Only/Revise Report and Data Specifies revision of the report data
only (Revise Data Only) or revision of the report data and the report output file (Revise
Report and Data). To revise the report specification without updating the report
output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and click
Accept. To revise the report output file only, set this toggle to Revise Report and
Data without modifying any of the fields, and click Accept. To modify both the report
file and the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise
Data Only, and click Accept.
If you update any field other than Report Number and Report Title,
this toggle is automatically set to Revise Report and Data, and the
report output file is generated.
179
________________
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Revise.
The Report Creation form is displayed with a list of available report files.
2. Select Report
From the displayed list, select the report to be revised. Then click Accept.
The fields update to display the selected report file specifications.
3. Revise Report Information
Update the report record information as needed.
printed.
5. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later

(Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time
that the report is to be submitted.
6. Click Accept to save the report file.
180
________________ Report Deletion Form
4.11.3 Report Deletion Form

records.
Manager
4.Drawing
Fields and Options
Operating Sequence
181
________________
182
________________ Report Approval Form
4.11.4 Report Approval Form

When you select Approve from the Report form, the Report Approval form is displayed.
Use this form to select a report to approve. Approving a report means that a database attribute
is set from not approved (the default) to approved. This approval status provides a way for
you to flag reports that you have run and verified that the output data is valid. When a report
is revised, the approval status is automatically reset to not approved.
Options
Number The 24-character unique name (as called short name) of the report record.
Manager
4.Drawing
Description The 40-character description of the report record.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Approve.
The Report Approval form is displayed.
2. From the displayed list, select a report to approve. Then click Accept.
The Approval form is displayed.
For more information, see Approval/Revision Interface Form, page 184.
183
________________
4.11.4.1 Approval/Revision Interface Form

The Approval form is displayed as part of the workflow for approving reports. First you
specify the report to be approved on the Report Approval form. When you click Accept, the
Approval/Revision Interface form is displayed.
The first time a report is approved, only the Approved By field is active. All other fields are
purely informational. The data displayed in these fields is read from the Revise Report form.
Fields and Options

file short name.
Report Description The 40-character descriptive name of the report file.
Approved By The initials (up to five characters) of the person who approved the
report.
Revision Number The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. This
field is read-only; you cannot edit it.
Revised By The initials (up to five characters) of the person who last revised the
report. This field is read-only; you cannot edit it.
184
________________ Approval/Revision Interface Form
Checked By The initials (up to five characters) of the person who ran the report with
the revised information. This field is read-only; you cannot edit it.
Revision Description Displays a short description of the revision. This field is

read-only; you cannot edit it.
Operating Sequence
1. On the Report Approval form, click Accept.
The Approval/Revision Interface form is displayed.
2. Specify Approval/Revision Data
Key in user initials in the Approved By field. Then click Accept.
Manager
4.Drawing
185
________________
4.11.5 Report Multiple Submit Form

When you select Multi-Create from the Report form, the Report Multiple Submit form is
displayed.
Use this form to submit multiple reports at the same time.
Fields and Options

Number The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report
file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short
name.
Description The 40-character descriptive name of the report file.
Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch Specifies when the report

will be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additional
fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.
186
________________ Report Multiple Submit Form
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report form, select Multi-Create.
The Report Multiple Submit form is displayed.
2. Select Reports for Submission
From the displayed list, select the reports to submit. Highlighed reports are selected;
select a highlighted report to remove the highlight and to not submit the report.
printed.
4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit to Batch Immediately) or

later (Delayed Submit to Batch). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date
and time that the report is to be submitted.
5. Click Accept to submit the reports.
Manager
4.Drawing
187
________________
4.12 Report Management Defaults Form

When you select Report Management Data from the Report Manager form, the Report
Management Defaults form is displayed.
This form creates a record in the project control database of the node name and path of the
report definition files. This option is used primarily for setup.
Fields
Report Path Specifies the default path of the report output files.
It is recommended that you not send output reports to your systems

temporary (that is, tmp or temp) directory.
Report Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which report output
files are located.
Report Format Path Specifies the default path of the format files.
Report Format Node Specifies the default node name of the system on which
format files are located.
Report Discrimination Data Path Specifies the default path of the discrimination
data files.
188
________________ Report Management Defaults Form
Report Discrimination Data Node Specifies the default node name of the system
on which discrimination data files are located.
Report Search Criteria Data Path Specifies the default path of the report search
criteria data files.
Report Search Criteria Data Node Specifies the default node name of the system
on which report search criteria data files are located.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Report Manager form, select Report Management Data.
The Report Management Defaults form is displayed.
2. Accept or Exit
In the fields provided, key in the default paths and node names for the report output
files, format files, discrimination data files, and search criteria data files. Then click
Accept.
Manager
4.Drawing
189
________________
4.13 Approve Drawing

This option activates the Approve Drawing form. It is used to input approval details for
drawings and drawing revisions. First, the system displays the Drawing Types display list, as
shown on the left. When a drawing type is selected and confirmed, the list of drawings of this
type will be displayed, as shown on the right.
When a specific drawing is selected and confirmed for approval, the Drawing Approval form
is activated.
This form displays the approval and revision fields which are used to store approval
information about drawings and revisions.
The Approval Status is automatically not approved when the drawing is

revised and the approval details are not updated.
The first time a drawing is approved only the Approval Initials field is
displayed. Once a drawing has been approved, all of the other revision fields
will be displayed.
190
________________ Approve Drawing
Commands
Do Not Load Title Block / Load Title Block Controls the automatic generation of
title block information for the drawing being aproved. The default setting for this
toggle is Load Title Block. The toggle is only active if the ASCII file that defines the
text nodes in the title block resides in the project directory. For more information, refer
to Automatic Title Block Generation, page 44.
Field Descriptions
Approved By Key in the initials of the person who approved the drawing or
revision.
Revision Number Displays the revision number as specified in the Create Drawing
or Revise Drawing forms.
Last Revision Displays the last revision number.
Revised By Displays the initials of the person who last revised the drawing.
Checked By Displays the initials of the person who checked the revisions performed
on the drawing.
Revision Description Displays the short description of the changes to the drawing
as specified in the Create Drawing or Revise Drawing forms.
Steps
1. Select the Approve Drawing option from the Drawing Manager form.
Manager
4.Drawing
The system activates a Drawing Types display list.
Select a drawing type, and select Accept.
The system displays a list of the existing drawings in the selected type.
3. Select Drawing
Select the drawing to be approved, and select Accept.
The system activates the Approval/Revision Interface form.
4. Key in the approval information for the report.
191
________________
5. Accept the approval information.
The system processes the information and automatically stores the date and time when
the drawing was approved.
Drawing Approval Status Updated
The system returns to the list of drawing views so that you can select another drawing
for approval.
6. Select Cancel to exit the form.
192
________________ Graphics Environment
5. Graphics Environment
This chapter provides information on all of the pull-down menus in the graphics environment
with the exception of the Drawing pull-down menu options.
Drawing This pull-down provides access to the Composition and Annotation

options. Each of these options are described in their own chapter. For more
information about Composition, refer to Composing Drawings, page 225; Annotation
is discussed in Annotating Drawings, page 291.
View This pull-down provides view manipulations. All of these commands result
in modifying what is seen in selected views. These commands only manipulate the
view of the model but do not manipulate the actual model.
File This pull-down provides basic file manipulation commands, such as

compressing and exiting the file. It also includes commands which allow you to plot
drawings or select another drawing.
Element This pull-down provides the Analyze command used to open the Element
Information settings box.
Settings This pull-down provides the ability to modify rendering, fonts and colors
used during a graphics session.
User This pull-down allows you to modify things that apply only to your system
such as how memory is used on your system, how windows are displayed, how various
items on the screen are laid out and behave, how reference files are attached by default,
and so on. As the name implies, you can adjust these settings to suit your preferences.
Environment
5.Graphics
193
________________
5.1 Drawing
These commands allow you to compose and annotate drawings.
Commands
Composition Activates the palette of Composition commands. Refer to
Composing Drawings, page 225 for the discussion of these commands.
Annotation Activates the palette of Annotation commands. Refer to Annotating

Drawings, page 291 for the discussion of these commands.
194
________________ View
5.2 View
These commands provide view manipulations. All of these commands result in
modifying what is seen in selected views. These commands only manipulate the
view of the model but do not manipulate the actual model. Each pull-down
command is detailed in its own section of this chapter.
Command Groups
Viewing Activates a palette of viewing options.
Viewing, More Activates another palette of viewing options.
Viewing Direction Activates a palette of viewing direction options that

allow for rotation of the view.
View Depth Activates a palette of view depth options that change the
depth of the view.
Open/Close Lets you open or close a view. The items in the sub-menu are
view numbers. The view numbers that are marked are open.
Bottom-to-Top Makes the bottom view fully visible, even if the view is
fully obscured before this item is chosen.
Cascade Stacks views in numerical order iwth the lowest numbered view
entirely visible and the title bar of each remaining view visible.
Tile Tiles open graphics views.
Swap Swaps the screen image between two logical screens. When Swap is
chosen, the physical screens are updated with the contents of the previously
hidden logical screen.
This item is dimmed if your system is configured with dual monitors or if it

does not support two virtual screens.
Environment
5.Graphics
Update Updates a view, all of the views, the right or left view or the grid
displayed on a view.
Previous Lets you view the previous viewing operation.
Next Lets you view the next viewing operation. This is only valid after
Previous.
195
________________
Copy Copies the content of one view into another specified view.
Camera Turns on the camera and defines the camera position and target.
On turns the camera on.
Off turns the camera off.
Set Up turns on and sets up the camera.
Move Camera moves the camera (like focusing the camera at an object
and moving around to obtain different views of it).
Move Target moves the target (like standing in one position and pointing
the camera at different objects).
Lens opens the Camera Lens setting box, which is used to set the angles
and focal lenths of view camera lenses. Changes take effect only if applied
with the Apply button.
Render Renders views in one of the following ways: wiremesh, hidden

line, filled hidden line, constant, smooth, phong, phong stereo, or phong
antialias. Also, FlyThrough activates the FlyThrough Producer setting box,
which is used to create simple animations, called sequences, for visualizing 3D
models.
196
________________ View
Levels Defines which levels are displayed in a view. Changes take effect
only if applied with the Apply button.
Rotation Opens the change view rotation box, which is used to control
view rotation. Changes take effect only if applied with the Apply button.
Environment
5.Graphics
197
________________
5.2.1 View Commands

These commands are the basic view modification commands that are available
from the View palette.
Commands
Window Center Defines a new center point for a window view.
Window Area Defines a window viewing area by two data points.
Viewing Options Sets the screen display and view control options. See Viewing Options, page
Zoom In Changes the magnification to focus on a smaller display area.
Zoom Out Changes the magnification to focus on a larger display area.
Fit Displays all elements in a selected view.
Drawing Categories Review or modify the displayed category data (segregation parameters)
associated with a screen view. See the Drawing Categories, page 201 section for more
information.
Set Reference Categories to Predefined Overrides user-specified reference category selection

for that drawing view, and uses system default reference categories for that drawing view instead.
198
________________ Viewing Options
Viewing Options
This command activates the Viewing Options form used to update the screen display, set
forms to display on the right or left screen, and set the view control options.
Commands
Update Both Select to update both the left (back) and right (front) display screens.
Update View Select and place a data point in the window view to be updated.
Update Left Select to update the left screen only.
Update Right Select to update the right screen only.
Copy View Copies a selected view display from one window to another.
Swap View Changes a selected view from either the right or left screen display.
View On Activates eight view options which correspond to the window views (1 -
4) on the right screen and the window views (5 - 8) on the left screen.
Environment
5.Graphics
Select the window view to be turned on by placing a data point on the displayed
window view option(s).
View Off Select and place a data point in the window view(s) to turn specified
view(s) off.
199
________________
Level Symbology On Enables the display of reference models with the active
reference model symbology.
Level Symbology Off Disables the display of reference models with the active
Reload Reference Symbology Reloads the display of reference models with the
active reference model symbology.
Form Right Screen/Form Left Screen Sets forms to be automatically displayed on

the right (front) screen or the left (back) screen.
Select Source View Place a data point to identify the drawing view as the
source to be copied.
Select Destination View(s) Place a data point to identify the window view(s) to
receive the copied drawing view.
200
________________ Drawing Categories
5.2.1.1 Drawing Categories

This command activates the Drawing Categories form. This form is used to review, revise,
add, and remove drawing categories for a selected view.
Options
Review/Revise Reviews and revises the drawing categories (display levels)
displayed in a selected view.
Add Adds drawing categories (display levels) to a selected view.
Remove Removes drawing categories (display levels) from a selected view.
Environment
5.Graphics
201
________________
5.2.1.1.1 Review/Revise Category

This option reviews and revises the drawing categories (display levels) displayed in a selected
view. This option is activated by default.
Select View Select the view for which you wish to revise/review
categories.
Accept or Select Category Select the categories to be turned off in the selected
view. Categories set ON for display will be highlighted,
and those set to OFF for display will not be highlighted.
Accept the selected (highlighted) categories.
OR
Select Cancel.
202
________________ Add Category
5.2.1.1.2 Add Category

This option activates the Add Drawing Categories form. It is used to add drawing categories
for display in a selected view. You can specify that all graphics be turned on for display, or
that only specific categories be turned on.
Commands
All Drawing Graphics Add all of the drawing graphic categories in the selected
view.
Hidden Line Graphics Add only hidden line categories for display.
Select Category Select the categories to turn on in the drawing view.
OR
Select the All Drawing Graphics option to turn on all

of the drawing graphic categories in the selected view.
OR
Environment
5.Graphics
Select the Hidden Line Graphics option to add only

hidden line categories for display.
Select View Place a data point to identify the view to display the
added categories.
Select View or Revise Categories

Select another view, or select Restart and select other
categories to be added.
203
________________
5.2.1.1.3 Remove Category

This option removes the drawing categories that are turned on in a selected view. The
categories are removed (deactivated) by de-highlighting them.
Commands
All Drawing Graphics Turns off all of the drawing graphic categories in the
selected view.
Hidden Line Graphics Removes only hidden line categories for display.
Select Category Select the categories to turn off in the drawing view.
OR
Select the All Drawing Graphics option to turn off all

of the drawing graphic categories in a selected view.
OR
Select the Hidden Line Graphics option to remove

only hidden line categories from the display.
Select View Place a data point to identify the view for category
removal.
Select View or Revise Categories

Select another view, or select Restart and select more
categories to be removed.
204
________________ View, More Commands
5.2.2 View, More Commands

These commands are the basic view modification commands made available by
using the View, More command.
Commands
Update Left Updates the screen display for the left virtual screen.
Update Right Updates the screen display for the right virtual screen.
Update All Updates the screen display for both left and right virtual screens.
Update View Updates the screen display for the selected window view.
Align View Aligns two views so that they display the same volume.
Copy View Copies one view to another view.
View On Turns on selected screen views.
View Off Turns off selected screen views.
View Toggle Turns On or Off the display of any of the eight screen views.
Move Up Moves you (pans) up in the selected view.
Move Down Moves you (pans) down in the selected view.
Move Left Moves you (pans) left in the selected view.

Environment
5.Graphics
Move Right Moves you (pans) right in the selected view.
Level Symbology On Displays reference models with the active reference model symbology.
Level Symbology Off Disables the display of reference models with the active reference model
symbology.
205
________________
Weight Display Toggle Toggles the line weight in the selected view to 0 or to the weight of
the graphic symbology of the graphics within the view.
Grid On/Off Toggles the grid on and off in the selected view.
206
________________ Viewing Direction
5.2.3 Viewing Direction

These commands are the basic view modification commands made available by selecting
Viewing Direction.
Commands
Rotate View - Element Rotates a view to align it with an existing planar element.
Rotate View - Absolute Rotates a view to a specific orientation.
Rotate View - Relative Rotates a view counterclockwise about its center.
Rotate about Z Axis Rotates view about the Z axis.
Rotate about X Axis Rotates view about the X axis.
Rotate about Y Axis Rotates view about the Y axis.
Rotate View by 3 Points Rotates a view as specified by data points.
Match Planar Element Rotates a view to align it with an existing planar element.
Dialog View Rotate Activates the MicroStation View Rotation dialog box.
Environment
5.Graphics
207
________________
5.2.4 View Depth

These commands are the basic view modification commands.
Commands
Set Active Depth Sets the active depth; key in the working unit value (relative to the current
active depth) of displacement.
Set Display Depth Specifies the front and back of a range in a 3D view to be displayed along
the Z axis.
Set Active Depth - Absolute Sets the active depth along the Z axis for a specified view.
Set Display Depth - Absolute Sets the display depth for a view. Specify the front and back
values which are the distances along the view Z axis from the global origin to the front and back
planes of the desired view cube.
Set Active Depth - Relative Sets the display depth for the active view, where depth is the
distance, in working units, to move the active depth along the Z axis.
Set Display Depth - Relative Sets the display depth for a view. Specify the front and back
values which are the relative distance along the view Z axis from the front and back planes of the
existing view cube to the front and back planes of the desired view cube.
Show Active Depth Displays the active depth for a specified view.
Show Display Depth Shows the display depth for a specified view.
208
________________ File
5.3 File
These commands allow you to plot drawings, display the active options, select another
drawing or do a file design.
Commands
Plot Allows you to select I/Plot parameters files, scale and rotation factors,
active or default categories, the submission time, and the queue used to plot the
drawing.
File Design Saves the active parameters defined in the current design session.
Exit Exits the design file.
Active Options Defines the parameters that determine the drawing annotation
modes for precision key-ins, activates the Plant Coordinate System or Design
Volume Coordinate System, and sets connect point mode.
Select Another Drawing Exits the active drawing and display a different
active drawing design file without exiting the drawing environment.
Environment
5.Graphics
209
________________
5.3.1 Plot
The Plot command activates the Plot Drawing form that allows you to select I/Plot
parameters files, scale and rotation factors, active or default categories, the submission time,
and the queue used to plot the drawing.
Commands
Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed Set toggle to submit the plot
immediately or to delay submission for a more convenient time.
Field Descriptions
I/Plot Parameter Files Displays the available I/Plot parameter files.
Queues Displays the available queues.
Accept to Submit, or Select Option

Select an I/Plot Parameters file to be included with your
drawing. If no parameters file is selected, the drawing
will be processed without one.
Select a queue. If no queue is selected, the system will

use the Default queue.
210
________________ Plot
Toggle from Submit Immediately to Submission is

Delayed to specify the time to submit the plotted
drawing.
Select Accept when all selections have been made.
This commands Default Pre-defined Drawing Categories toggle is different from

the default setting of the Plot Drawing command in Plot Manager.
Environment
5.Graphics
211
________________
5.3.2 File Design

The File Design command allows you to save the active parameters defined in the current
design session. This command saves:
MicroStation parameters such as active views and active display volumes
PDS parameters such as active segment parameters. It also saves the screen location of
the Piping Designer base form.
212
________________ Exit
5.3.3 Exit
The Exit command is used to exit graphics and save all changes to the design file. Exiting a
design file does NOT save the active parameters set in the file. To save the active parameters,
you must use the File Design command.
Environment
5.Graphics
213
________________
5.3.4 Active Options

This command activates the Active Options form. It is used to control how the active drawing
design graphics look when displayed on the screen. It specifies or changes the defaults for the
Coordinate Label and Name Label orientation, determines connect points, and specifies the
placement location of combination labels.
Modes
Drawing Provides PDS-specific key-ins of absolute coordinates and distances for
miscellaneous drawing annotation with Microstation commands in terms of the
coordinate system with respect to the drawings scale.
For drawing annotation in the Drawing View mode, the following distance key-ins are
interpreted in terms of the drawing scale.
PXY absolute easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in terms of the selected
coordinate system and the drawing scale.
This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command.
PDX delta easting distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the
drawing scale.
PDY delta northing distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the
drawing scale.
PDZ delta elevation distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the
drawing scale.
214
________________ Active Options
PDL delta easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in terms of the selected
coordinate system and the drawing scale.
PDK a distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the drawing scale
(for use with the Microstation commands that require a distance key-in, "D=", e.g.
Copy Parallel by Distance).
This key-in results in a distance key-in being defined to the active command.
The system displays an error message when absolute coordinate key-ins

are used with this option.
Detail Provides PDS-specific key-ins of absolute coordinates and distances to define

miscellaneous drawing annotation with Microstation commands for user-created details
in terms of the coordinate system with respect to the user-defined active scale. For
instance, you may place a line where the end points have been specified in terms of the
selected coordinate system relative to a specific drawing.
For drawing annotation in the Detail mode, the following distance key-ins are
interpreted in terms of the selected scale.
PDX delta X distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the selected
scale.
PDY delta Y distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the selected
scale.
PDZ delta Z distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the selected
scale.
PDL delta X, Y, and Z distances in terms of the selected coordinate system and the
selected scale.
Environment
5.Graphics
PDK an absolute distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the
selected scale (for use with the Microstation commands that require a distance key-
in, "D=", such as Copy Parallel by Distance).
215
________________
Drawing View Provides PDS-specific key-ins of absolute coordinates and distances

to define miscellaneous drawing annotation in terms of the coordinate system with
respect to the selected drawing views scale and orientation within the drawing.
For drawing annotation in the Drawing View mode, the following distance key-ins are
interpreted in terms of the selected drawing views scale and orientation within the
drawing.
PXY absolute easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in terms of the selected
coordinate system and the active drawing view.
PDX delta easting distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the
PDY delta northing distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the
"active drawing view"
PDZ delta elevation distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the
PDL delta easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in terms of the selected
coordinate system and the active drawing view.
PDK a distance in terms of the selected coordinate system and the active drawing
view (for use with the Microstation commands that require a distance key-in, "D=",
e.g. Copy Parallel by Distance).
The system displays an error message when absolute coordinate key-ins

are used with this option.
Commands
Plant Coordinate System / Design Volume Coordinate System If the coordinate
toggle is set to Plant Coordinate System, the Plant Coordinate System is used to
define the key-ins. If coordinate toggle is set to Design Volume Coordinate System,
the coordinate system of the active design volume is used to define the key-ins.
216
________________ Active Options
All Connect Points/Nearest Connect Point If the toggle is set to All Connect
Points, the system locates the connect points by priority (CP1, CP2, ... ). You can press
<R> to move to the successive connect points. Then press <D> to accept the location.
If the toggle is set to Nearest Connect Point, the system locates the connect point
closest to the cursor position when you pressed <D>.
Steps
1. Select the Active Options command from the bar menu.
The system displays the Active Options form with the Drawing mode activated.
2. Select Option
Select the Detail mode to define PDS-specific key-ins for miscellaneous drawing
annotation for user-created details in terms of the coordinate system with respect to the
user-defined, active scale.
OR
Select the Drawing View mode to define PDS-specific key-ins for miscellaneous
drawing annotation in terms of the coordinate system with respect to a specific drawing
views scale.
OR
Leave the Drawing mode to define PDS-specific key-ins for miscellaneous drawing
annotation in terms the coordinate system with respect to the drawings scale.
3. Set the coordinate system toggle to Plant Coordinate System to define the key-ins in
terms of the Plant Coordinate System.
OR
Set the coordinate system toggle to Design Volume Coordinate System to define the
key-ins in terms of the coordinate system of the active design volume.
4. Set the connect point toggle to All Connect Points for the system to locate the connect
points by numeric priority (CP1, CP2, ...).
OR
Environment
5.Graphics
Set the connect point toggle to Nearest Connect Point for the system to locate the
connect point closest to the cursor position when you press <D>.
5. Specify the appropriate placement location for placing a combination label by pressing
<D>.
217
________________
218
________________ Select Another Drawing
5.3.5 Select Another Drawing

This command activates the Drawing Selection form. It is used to exit the active drawing
and activate another drawing in the project without exiting the drawing environment. You can
also exit the current design file and activate a different type drawing design file.
The Drawing Selection form is also used to Copy From Another Drawing and Copy Another
Drawing.
Steps
1. Select File > File Options from the main menu bar.
2. Select the Select Another Drawing from the <File Options palette.
The system activates the Drawing Selection form with a list of available drawing types.
Select the type of drawing to be activated, and Accept the selected drawing type.
The system activates a list of drawings for the selected drawing type.
Environment
5.Graphics
4. Select Drawing
Select the drawing to be activated, and select Accept.
The system exits the current drawing design file and displays the new active design
drawing without exiting the drawing environment.
219
________________
5.4 Element
The Element pull-down provides the Analyze command .
Analyze
The Analyze option opens the Element Information settings box, which is used to change
the attributes of an element(s) and review design file data associated with them, such as
geometry and database attributes.
DO NOT use the Analyze command to change any properties of a PDS element.
This feature should be used only as an investigative tool in PDS applications. It is
permissible to use this command on non-intelligent, user-defined elements in the
model file; however, use of this command should be limited to those elements.
When the Analyze command is active and a single graphics element is selected, the displayed
data pertains to that element. Use the Next command to display data on any nested elements.
The element type is shown in the title bar. The type number is shown in the upper left corner
of the settings box.
Refer to the MicroStation Users Guide for more information on the Analyze command.
220
________________ Settings
5.5 Settings
The Settings commands provide the ability to modify rendering, fonts and colors used during
a graphics session.
Command Groups
Colors Modifies the colors used in the graphics environment. Use the File Design
command from the File palette to save your settings before exiting the design file.
Each tile in the color palette represents a color in the active color table. To modify a
color, you must first select it. The selected color has an enlarged tile in which its index
number (0-255) is displayed. The view background color is in the lower right corner of
the palette, denoted by "B."
Double-clicking a tile opens the Modify Color dialog box, which is used to modify the
color.
Fonts Opens the Fonts setting box. To see a type sample for a font, select in the list
box.
Environment
5.Graphics
221
________________
Rendering Opens the Rendering Settings box, which is used to adjust rendering
settings. It controls distance cuing, which determine how atmospheric fading is set in
the view. You can also set the Fog Color in this dialog box, which can be used to create
a realistic atmospheric haze.
222
________________ User
5.6 User
These commands provide access to PDS help and to the user preferences and button
assignment that are specific to your system.
Help
Displays Help for the PDS 3D products.
User Preferences
The User Preferences command changes things that apply only to your system such as how
memory is used on your system, how windows are displayed, how various items on the screen
are laid out and behave, how reference files are attached by default, and so on. As the name
implies, you can adjust these settings to suit your preferences.
Button Assignments
The Button Assignments command changes digitizing tablet or mouse button assignments.
You can change the 3D Data and 3D Tentative buttons assignments, as well as 10 cursor
button assignments for cursor button menus.
Environment
5.Graphics
223
________________
224
________________ Composing Drawings
6. Composing Drawings
Composing a drawing means defining the drawing views and placing them in their
appropriate locations within the drawing. This is done using the Drawing Composition /
Annotation command. Selecting this command activates the graphics environment. Several
of the commands in the graphics environment have the same functionality as those found
outside the graphics environment. For more information about the graphics environment,
refer to Graphics Environment, page 193.
These commands are used to create drawings and composite drawing views, create and copy
drawing views, and specify the characteristics necessary to place (compose) drawings.
Additionally, you can attach and detach reference files, and add, remove, and review model
categories.
These commands activate the same forms and functions as those used in the Drawing
Manager non-graphical environment.
Topics
Create Drawing View Defines the drawing view by selecting a saved view definition,
selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume, or setting the data coordinates
and clipping volume for a specifically defined named item.
Create Composite View Creates a composite drawing view for a drawing by using
multiple saved view definitions.
Copy Drawing View Copies an existing drawing view to create a new view for the same
or another drawing.
Create Section View Creates section lines for creating a composite drawing view of an
elevation view.
Create Composite Plan View Creates a composite plan view where the drawing view is
composed from an elevation view.
Compose Drawing Controls the placement and characteristics of drawing views (or
composite views) within the drawing border.
Composition
6.Drawing
225
________________
6.1 Create Drawing View

This option creates a drawing view for an existing drawing. You can specify the drawing
view by using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model, selecting the
orientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used, or by setting the data
coordinates and clipping volume to create a drawing view for a specifed named item. The
saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view and defines the
orientation.

Commands
226
level = 62
color = 0 (white)
weight = 0
line style = 0
Saved View Uses a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping
volume of the drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 236 for more information.
Named Item Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically
defined named item to create the drawing view. Refer to Named Item, page 230 for
more information.
Define View Location Defines the location of the drawing view within the
drawing border and automatically composes the drawing view. Refer to Define View
Although you will not be prompted to define the view location, you should use
this command between defining the view parameters and confirming the form.
Composition
6.Drawing
227
________________
Field Descriptions
View Number Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view number
(short code - up to 6 characters) for the drawing view to be created. The system verifies
that the drawing view number is unique within the project.
View Name Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view name (long
description - up to 40 characters) associated with the specified drawing view.
View Scale Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list and specify a
new scale value for the drawing view. The default scale value is the same as the value
used when the drawing was created.
point.
Specify Drawing View Number Key in up to 6 alphanumeric characters to identify

Specify Drawing View Name Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe

Select Drawing View Orientation Select one of the seven view orientation options
from the center of the form.
Specify Clipping Volume Key in the view coordinates to define the clipping
volume. (The system does not have to have the Low
coordinates in the Low field and the High
coordinates in the High field; the command will
work properly as long as the coordinated entered are
diagonally opposed.)
OR

defined named item to create the drawing view.
Refer to Named Item, page 230 for more
information.
OR
Select the Saved View option to use a saved view

model to define the orientation and clipping volume
of the drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 236
228
Accept or Select Other Options Accept the displayed values.
When the toggle is set to Select Models, the system displays the models for
the selected area. The Attach by Area setting will attach all reference models
in the chosen area.
Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model
files for a specified area or to Select Models to specify
the individual reference models to be attached.
Composition
6.Drawing
229
________________
6.1.1 Named Item

This option activates the Create Drawing View from Named Item form. It is used to define
the data coordinates and clipping volume for a drawing view from a named item.

Field Descriptions
clipping volume.
point.
230
________________ Named Item
Commands
Specify Component Number Set the Select By Model/Select By Project toggle to the
appropriate setting, then select one of the Number
commands to specify a named item. See Named Item by
Model, page 232 and Named Item by Project, page 234
Composition
6.Drawing
231
________________
6.1.1.1 Named Item by Model

This toggle setting selects a named item in a specific model to define the delta coordinates and
clipping volume to be used in the drawing view.

Commands
Select by Project Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named item

component, then activates a series of forms that promt you to select the area that
contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and
confirmed, you must then specify the component number for the specific named item.

component, then activates a series of forms that promt you to select the area that
contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and
confirmed, you must then specify the component number for the specific named item.
Equipment Number Defines the type of named item as an equipment item, then
activates a series of forms that promt you to select the area that contains the model that
contains the named item. Once an area is selected and confirmed, you must then
specify the component number for the specific named item.
232
________________ Named Item by Model
equipment item with a nozzle item, then activates a series of forms that promt you to
select the area that contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is
selected and confirmed, you must then specify the component number for the specific
named item.
Select Model Changes the model after one has already been selected through one of
the Number options.
Field Descriptions
which fits the named item. When the named item has been defined, its delta
coordinates are displayed automatically. You can then change any of the Delta
Coordinates to revise the displayed clipping volume.
point.
Select Area or Exit Select the area that contains the model that contains the
named item, and select Accept.
Select Model or Exit Select the model that contains the named item, and
select Accept.
Specify Component Number Place a data point in the field left of the model-name
display field, key in the appropriate item number for the
component in the model and select and press <Enter>.
equipnum/nozzlenum. Composition
6.Drawing
233
________________
6.1.1.2 Named Item by Project

This option selects a named item from any of the models in the project to define the delta
coordinates and clipping volume to be used in the drawing view.

Commands

component.

component.
Equipment Number Defines the type of named item as an equipment item.
equipment item with a nozzle item.
234
________________ Named Item by Project
Field Descriptions
clipping volume.
point.
Specify Component Number Place a data point in the field and key in the appropriate
item number to specify either the Piping Component
Number, Instrument Component Number,
Equipment Number, or Equipment Number &
Nozzle Number for the named item in the project.
equipnum/nozzlenum.
Composition
6.Drawing
235
________________
6.1.2 Saved View

This option creates a drawing view using a saved view to define the orientation, clipping
volume, and reference model inclusion. Reference models will not be filtered on the basis of
the discipline defined using the Project Setup command but instead, will be available
regardless of their discipline if they are in the saved view.
When creating a drawing view using a model view that was saved prior to this enhancement,
the Saved Model View command attaches the reference models active at the time the drawing
view is created. Otherwise, the reference models associated with the model at the time the
saved model view was created are attached. You can revise the reference model attachments.

A saved view must have been defined while working in one of the PDS 3D-Modeling
tasks.
Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline containing the model with the saved
Select Area or Exit Select the area containing the model with the saved
Select Model Select the model for the drawing view to be created, and
select Accept.
Select Saved View Select the saved view name for the drawing view to be
236
________________ Define View Location
6.1.3 Define View Location

This option activates the Define View Location form. It is used to define the location of a
drawing view relative to the cutting edge of the drawing border and composes it
automatically. The distance between the drawing view border and the drawing border is
specified in the drawplotsize file and is defined by the size of the drawing. Refer to the
Drawing Plot Size Table section in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information.

Commands
Upper Left Defines the drawing view location in the upper left quadrant of the
Upper Right Defines the drawing view location in the upper right quadrant of the
Center Defines the drawing view location in the center of the drawing view border.
Lower Left Defines the drawing view location in the lower left quadrant of the
Lower Right Defines the drawing view location in the lower right quadrant of the
Composition
6.Drawing
237
________________
Field Descriptions
with the value of X-l as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this
document.
y1 Displays the y1 distance from the drawing view border. This value corresponds
with the value of Y-t as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this
document.
with the value of X-r as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this
document.
y2 Displays the y2 distance from the drawing view border. Displays the x2 distance
from the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of Y-b as
described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document.
Specify Drawing View Location Place a data point on the button representing the
quadrant where the drawing should be placed.
238
________________ Create Composite View
6.2 Create Composite View

This command activates the Create Composite Drawing View form. It is used to create a
composite view. A composite drawing view is a drawing view which is a composite of
several model views with different clipping volumes. You can define the views in a
composite drawing view by:
Setting the Clipping Volume to define a drawing view as a specific clipping volume
(cube) in the model design file.
Specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model. The saved
view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.
For either of the above options, you can specify the active category data for the drawing view.
Commands
Orientation Select one of the seven options to specify the viewing direction of the
drawing view.
The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique

drawing category, Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement,
the user-defined drawing annotation category that was previously called
Match Lines is now called Match Lines by User.
Composition
6.Drawing
239
________________
The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the

Coordinate Labels category, as are all other coordinate labels.
The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing
views clipping boundary, as specified in the drawing management data
of the Project Control Database. A line spacing factor specified for this
option through Project Data Manager will determine the distance
between the match line and the coordinate label.
These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they

will be appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise
Drawing View or Move Drawing View commands are used.
Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default
line spacing for all other coordinate lables will be used.
The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate labels text
will be determined on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in
Project Data Manager, as it is for any other coordinate label. If the
coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbology
data for the default coordinate label will be used.
The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following
default values until you specify different values through Project Data
Manager:
level = 62
color = 0 (white)
weight = 0
line style = 0
Define Views Defines, revises, or rejects drawing views for the composite drawing
view. See Define Views for Composite Drawing View, page 242 and Define Composite
Drawing With Saved View, page 244 for more information.
Define View Location Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the
drawing border and have the drawing view composed automatically. See Define View
Field Descriptions
Composite View Number Key in the composite drawing view number (short name
- up to 6 characters) for the composite drawing view to be created. The system verifies
that the number is unique within the project.
Composite View Name Key in the view name (long description - up to 40

characters) associated with the specified composite drawing view.
240
________________ Create Composite View
Composite View Scale The scale value specified when the drawing was created is
automatically filled in. Select the field to activate a scale display list, and select from
the available scale values to change the scale to be used for the composite drawing
view.

the composite drawing view to be created.

the composite drawing view to be created.
Select Drawing View Orientation Select one of the seven view orientation options
from the center of the form.
Select Individual Views Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject

drawing views for the composite drawing view. See
Define Views for Composite Drawing View, page 92
THEN
Accept all of the specified views for the composite

Accept or Select Another Option Select the Define View Location option to pre-
define the location of the drawing view within the
drawing border and have the drawing view
composed automatically.
THEN
Accept all of the specified views for the composite

Select Area or Exit Select the area to attach to the drawing view or the
area that contains the models to be attached.
attached.
Composition
6.Drawing
241
________________
6.2.1 Define Views for Composite Drawing View

This option activates the Drawing Views field. It is used to define, revise, or reject drawing
views for the composite drawing view.
Commands
Saved View Defines the clipping volume for a drawing view using a model saved
view. See Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View, page 94 for more
information.
Reject View Deletes the view from the selected composite drawing view.
Field Descriptions
this field. You may define up to ten views.
Drawing View Volume Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation
Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second
point.
Specify Clipping Volume Specify the Drawing View Volume coordinates as

follows to define the individual drawing views for
the composite drawing view.
242
________________ Define Views for Composite Drawing View
Key in each coordinate individually or select the

Saved View option to use a model saved view to
define the clipping volume for a drawing view. See
Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View,
page 94 for more information.
OR
Select a drawing view and select the Reject View to

delete the view from the selected composite drawing
view.
Accept or Select Another Option Accept all of the view definitions.
When this form is confirmed, the system creates the composite drawing view
in the database. The center of the MicroStation reference file attachment for
the first saved model view definition specified is used to position the
composite drawing view during drawing composition. The system determines
the location of the remaining reference file attachments for the corresponding
saved model view definitions relative to the first reference file attachment.
The categories of data displayed and plotted in each of the drawing views is
determined from the corresponding saved model view definitions used to
define the viewing direction and the clipping limits.
An example of a composite drawing view is shown below:
After creating the composite drawing view, the Attach Drawing View Models form is
activated to attach reference models. Refer to Automatic Attach & Verify, page 275 for more
information.
Composition
6.Drawing
243
________________
6.2.2 Define Composite Drawing With Saved View

The Saved View option on the Create Composite Drawing View form is used to specify a
model saved view to define the clipping volume of the composite drawing view being created.
You can create as many as ten drawing views, and the Drawing View block is updated as
each view is created.

The composite drawing view number, name, scale, and orientation must be specified on the
Create Composite Drawing View form in Drawing Manager.
Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline for the composite drawing view to
be created, and select Accept.
Select Area or Exit Select the area for the composite drawing view to be
Select Model Select the model for the composite drawing view to be
Select Saved Model View Select the saved view name to be used to define the
clipping volume of the composite drawing view, and
Accept the view definition.
244
6.2.3 Create Composite Drawing Views Example

You can create a composite drawing view and attach reference model files to individual
drawing views within the composite drawing view. The composite drawing view is the
composite of up to ten drawing views and its volume is the composite volume of those views.
Youll want to do this when, for example, the model looks like this:
And this is how you want the drawing file to look.
Composition
6.Drawing
245
________________
Before you create the composite drawing view, youll need to know the coordinates for
all volumes to be used.
Write down two sets of coordinates (low and high) for each volume. These will define
the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the two corner points for
the volume. The second point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.
elevation.)
246
Create composite drawing view name and

number:
2. Select the discipline from the Drawing Type list, and confirm.
3. Select the drawing from the drawing list, and confirm.
project.
confirm.
Composition
6.Drawing
247
________________
view.
Define the views to be used in the

composite drawing view:
1. Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject drawing views for the composite
drawing view.
You can define the views in one of two ways:
By specifying the volumes of the drawing views in the model design file (as
specified in the earlier example). When you do this, you are specifying the
clipping volume.
By specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model.
The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.
To define the views by specifying the

clipping volume:
1. Key in all six coordinate values in the Drawing View Volume field for the first drawing
view to be used in the composite drawing view, then confirm.
2. Key in coordinate values for each drawing view to be used in the composite drawing
view, then confirm. You can define up to ten views to be used in the composite
drawing view.
248
3. After all of the drawing views are defined, exit the form.
4. Accept the form that appears, and the system updates the database.
To define the views by specifying a saved

view:
Note that the saved views must already exist.
1. Select Saved View.
2. Select the discipline of the drawing view to be added, and confirm.
3. Select the area that contains the saved view, and confirm.
4. Select the model with the saved view to be used, and confirm.
5. Select the saved view to be used to define the clipping volume of the drawing view, and
confirm.
6. Continue to define the additional saved views that are to be used in the composite
drawing view, then confirm. You can define up to ten views to be used in the
7. After all of the drawing views are defined, Accept the form.
The system updates the database.

Composition
6.Drawing
249
________________
8. Exit the form that appears.
Attach the drawing view models, and

complete the composite drawing view:
1. Select the discipline and Accept.
2. Select the area to attach to the drawing view or the area that contains the models to be
attached (or toggle Select Models to Select Area to attach all models in that area), then
confirm.
3. If you did not toggle to Select Area, select the model to be used to attach the drawing
view, then confirm.
4. If there are more reference files to attach, continue this same process. Otherwise, exit.
250
6.3 Copy Drawing View

This option activates the Copy Drawing View form. It is used to copy an existing drawing
view for the same or a different drawing. This option also allows composite drawing views to
be copied.
When a drawing view of one drawing type is copied into a drawing of a

different drawing type, this command will attach the deisciplines as specified
for the destination drawing type in Project Setup Manager.
Field Descriptions
Source Data
Drawing Type Displays the discipline of the active drawing. You may select a
different source drawing type by placing a data point in this field.
Drawing Number Displays the active drawing number. You may select a different
source drawing number by placing a data point in this field.
View Number Selecting this field activates a view number display list that prompts
you to select a view number for the specified source drawing.
Composition
6.Drawing
251
________________
Destination Data
Drawing Number Select the drawing number from a list of existing drawings which
will receive the new drawing view.
Drawing View Number Key in the drawing view number (up to 6 characters) for
Drawing View Name Key in the drawing view name (up to 40 characters) for the
new drawing view.
Drawing View Scale Select a scale value from the drawing view scale.
Composition Options
Define Location Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the drawing
border and composes the drawing view automatically. Within the graphics environment,
this option is only active when the source and destination view numbers are the same.
See Define View Location, page 237 for more information.
Do Not Compose Attaches the view to the drawing, but does not compose it. The
view will not be displayed in graphics.
Compose Coincident Defines the composition point of the destination drawing

view to be the same as the source drawing view, when the drawing view is being copied
from a different drawing. Therefore, the drawing view will have the same location in
the destination drawing as in the source drawing. If the composition point for the source
drawing is not defined, this option is not active.
This allows drawing annotation to be shared using the Overlay Drawing Annotation
option. See the Overlay Drawing, page 336 for more information.
252
level = 62
color = 0 (white)
weight = 0
line style = 0
Select Drawing View Select the Drawing View Number of the drawing
view to be copied.
Specify Drawing View Number Place a data point in the Drawing View Number:
field and key in the drawing view number (up to 6
characters) for the drawing view to be created. The
view number must be unique within the project. If
you key in a number currently in use, the system will
display an error message informing you that the view
number is not unique.
Specify Drawing View Name Place a data point in the Drawing View Name: field
and key in the drawing view name (up to 40
characters) for the new drawing view.
Accept to Copy Drawing View Accept the form and copy the drawing view.
Composition
6.Drawing
253
________________
6.4 Create Section View

This command activates the Create Section Drawing View form. It is used to create section
lines for creating a composite drawing view of an elevation view. A fence shape is specified
to define the clipping volume of the section view. You can specify the section drawing view
by using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model, selecting the
orientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used, or setting the data
coordinates and clipping volume to create a drawing view for a specifically defined named
item. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view and
defines the orientation.

the model before selecting this command. See the section describing Saved View.
Field Descriptions
View Number Select and key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 6
characters) for the drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the drawing
view number is unique within the project.
View Name Select and key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40
characters) associated with the specified drawing view.
View Scale The system displays the scale value defined when the drawing was
created. You can use this scale value, or select the field to activate a scale display list.
Then, select a new scale value for the drawing view to be created.
Drawing View Volume Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and
Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You
can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
254
________________ Create Section View
Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the
second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first
corner point.
Commands
Named Item Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically defined
named item to create the drawing view. Refer to Named Item, page 230 for more
information.
Saved View Uses a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping volume
of the drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 236 for more information.

this drawing view.

this drawing view.

Select one of the five view orientation options from
the center of the form to specify the orthographic
view.
Specify Clipping Volume Select each of the Drawing View Volume fields
from the center of the form, and key in the view
coordinates to define the drawing view volume.
OR

OR

of the drawing view.
Accept or Select Other Options Accept the displayed coordinate values.
Composition
6.Drawing
255
________________
attached.
selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays the categories.
Identify Origin Place a data point to identify the origin in the drawing to
compose the section view. The section view is
composed initially as a plan view.
Identify Fence Points Place a series of data points to specify a fence shape to
define the clipping volume of the section view. The
fence points are axis locked automatically.
Rectangular coordinates are formed from the fence points and the initial drawing view
volume to form the individual drawing views of the composite drawing view. An error
message is displayed if the number of individual drawing views formed by the fence shape
exceeds the maximum number of drawing views per composite drawing view. A composite
drawing view is formed automatically to define the section view, and the drawing view is re-
displayed with the specified elevation view orientation.
256
________________ Create Composite Plan View
6.5 Create Composite Plan

View
This option activates the Create Composite Plan Drawing View form. It is used to create
composite plan views where the drawing view is composed from an elevation view. You can
specify the section drawing view by using a saved view definition created for a screen view in
the model, selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be
used, or setting the data coordinates and clipping volume to create a drawing view for a
specifically defined named item. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for
the drawing view and defines the orientation.

the model before selecting this command. See the section describing Saved View.
Field Descriptions
View Number Select and key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 6
characters) for the composite plan drawing view to be created. The system verifies that
the drawing view number is unique within the project.
View Name Select and key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40
characters) associated with the specified composite plan drawing view.
View Scale The system displays the scale value defined when the drawing was
created. You can use this scale value, or select the field to activate a scale display list.
Then, select a new scale value for the drawing view to be created.
Composition
6.Drawing
257
________________
Drawing View Volume Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and
Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X". (You
can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)
Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the
second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first
corner point.
Commands
coordinate labels when the drawing view is created. The match lines will be placed at
the clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will
be placed parallel to each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawing
views.
258
________________ Create Composite Plan View
level = 62
color = 0 (white)
weight = 0
line style = 0

this composite plan drawing view.

this composite plan drawing view.

Select one of the four initial view direction options
from the center of the form to specify the viewing
direction.
Specify Clipping Volume Select each of the Drawing View Volume fields
from the center of the form, and key in the view
coordinates to define the drawing view volume.
OR

OR

of the drawing view.
Accept or Select Other Options Accept the displayed coordinate values.
Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the
model files for a specified area or to Select Models
to specify the individual reference models to be
attached.
Composition
6.Drawing
259
________________
Select Model Select the model to be used to attach the drawing

view.
selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays the categories.
Identify Origin Place a data point to identify the origin in the drawing to
compose the section view. The section view is
composed initially as a plan view.
Identify Fence Points Place a series of data points to specify a fence shape to
define the clipping volume of the section view. The
fence points are axis locked automatically.
Rectangular coordinates are formed from the fence points and the initial drawing view
volume to form the individual drawing views of the composite drawing view. An error
message is displayed if the number of individual drawing views formed by the fence shape
exceeds the maximum number of drawing views per composite drawing view. A composite
drawing view is formed automatically to define the section view, and the drawing view is re-
displayed with the specified elevation view orientation.
260
________________ Compose Drawing
6.6 Compose Drawing

This option activates the Compose Drawing form. It is used to control the placement and
characteristics of drawing views (or composite drawing views) within the drawing border.
You can place, manipulate, revise and delete the drawing views. It is also used, along with a
series of other forms, to turn off the drawing view displays before the hidden-line graphics
can be viewed in the drawing environment.
Field Descriptions
Number Displays the number (up to 6 characters) that identifies the drawing view.
Name Displays the name (up to 40 characters) that describes the drawing view.
Scale Displays the scale of the drawing view.
Composed Displays the composition status (Yes or No) of the drawing view.
Commands
Display On / Off - Controls whether or not the selected reference models will display
Snap On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selected
reference models.
Composition
6.Drawing
261
________________
Locate On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can copy database information from
the reference models into the active file.
Compose Drawing View Select to place the active drawing view within the
drawing border.
Reference Models Select to copy reference files, attach and detach models, add,
remove, and review model categories. Refer to Reference Models, page 267 for more
information.
Delete Drawing View Select and press <D> to accept the highlighted drawing
view for deletion. Press <R> to reject the view and make another selection.
The system deletes the alphanumeric description of the drawing view in the database
files and deletes the drawing composition graphics for the drawing view from the
drawing. It also detaches the reference file attachments for the drawing view.
Align Drawing View Select to align two existing (composed) drawing views.
Refer to Align Drawing View, page 284 for more information.
Revise View Data Select to revise the clipping volume and scale data of the active
drawing view (or composite drawing view). Refer to Revise View Data, page 286 for
more information.
Revise Orientation Select to change the viewing direction of the active drawing
view (or composite drawing view). Refer to Revise Orientation, page 288 for more
information.
Unassigned Views Select to activate a list of unassigned views from which you can
choose a view to be composed. Refer to Unassigned Views, page 290 for more
information.
Select Drawing View Select the appropriatect drawing view number from the
list of drawing views.
Select Options Set toggle locks (only valid for composed drawing
views) to on or off, then select any other appropriate
option.
262
________________ Compose Drawing View
6.7 Compose Drawing View

This option lets you specify the origin at which to place the active drawing view within the
drawing border.
This option also places MicroStation construction class graphics that represent the outline of
each drawing view. The graphic parameters for the outline are defined by the drawing
category for Non-plotted Drawing Graphics. An example of a drawing view outline is shown
in the following figure.
Composition
6.Drawing
263
________________
Field Descriptions
Number Displays the number (up to 6 characters) that identifies the drawing view.
Name Displays the name (up to 40 characters) that describes the drawing view.
Scale Displays the scale of the drawing view.
Composed Displays the composition status (Yes or No) of the drawing view.
Commands
Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for all
other coordinate lables will be used.
The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate labels text will be determined on
the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for any
other coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic
symbology data for the default coordinate label will be used.
The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until you
specify different values through Project Data Manager:
level = 62
264
________________ Compose Drawing View
color = 0 (white)
weight = 0
line style = 0
This option also places MicroStation construction class graphics that represent the outline of
each drawing view. The graphic parameters for the outline are defined by the drawing
category for Non-plotted Drawing Graphics.
Identify Origin Place a data point within the drawing border to locate
the center of the drawing view.
Notes
When the Compose Drawing form is active, you can move any drawing view
(or composite drawing view) within the drawing border. You can drag the
outline of the drawing views to confirm that the views fit within the drawing
border and do not accidentally overlap other drawing views.
You can overlap another drawing view if necessary to show a detail view
within an elevation view, for example. You can also confirm the drawing view
scale and the size of the drawing border.
The system will automatically define a display depth large enough to display
the drawing view graphics.
Composition
6.Drawing
265
________________
To move a drawing view within the border file, snap to the outline (or any
element) of the drawing view to be moved. Then drag the highlighted graphics
to the preferred location and press <D> to accept the location.
The move does not affect any annotation graphics associated with the drawing
view. Therefore, you should not move the drawing view once the drawing
sheet has been annotated with dimensioning, labels, etc. (You can use the
Update Labels command to re-attach intelligent labels after moving or
redefining a drawing view. However, this does not update dimensioning or
dumb labels.)
266
6.7.1 Reference Models

This option activates the Drawing View Ref Model Attachments form. It contains a list of
the current reference models attached to the active drawing view. The form contains options
that copy drawings, attach and detach models, and add, remove, and review model categories.

The active drawing view must be specified on the Compose Drawing form.
Field Descriptions
Disc/Model Number Displays one character to identfiy the discipline, and displays
the model number.
Description Displays the description assigned to the model.
DSP SNP LOC Displays the models Display, Snap, and Locate toggle status.
Commands
Composition
6.Drawing
Display On / Off - Controls whether or not the selected reference models will display
267
________________
Snap On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selected
reference models.
Locate On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can copy database information from
the reference models into the active file.
Apply to Active / Discipline / All Assigns the Display, Snap, and Locate toggle
settings to either the active drawing view only, or to all drawing views in the same
discipline as the active drawing view, or to all possible drawing views in all disciplines.
Copy Active Drawing Used to copy reference file attachments from the drawing
views in the active drawing.
Copy Another Drawing Copies reference model attachments from drawing view
in the project.
Attach Model Attaches reference models to a specified drawing view.
Automatic Attach & Verify Automatically attaches reference files for the active
drawing view. It displays a list of all models in the project that are within the range of
the selected drawing view volume.
Detach Model Removes the reference file from a specified drawing view (deletes
the reference model entry).
Reference Model Categories Reviews/revises, adds, or deletes model categories

for the active reference model.
Reload Reference Model Automatically reloads all selected reference models for a
drawing view.
Select Model Select a model from the list, then make any necessary
revisions to the toggle settings, then select an option
from the bottom of the form.
OR
Select Cancel to exit.
268
________________ Copy Active Drawing
6.7.1.1 Copy Active Drawing

This option activates the Drawing View Selection form. It is used to copy reference model
attachments from the specified active drawing view. First, the system displays the Drawing
View Selection list. After a drawing view is selected and accepted, the system then displays
the Copy Drawing View Attachments form which allows you to copy models from the
Commands
Field Descriptions
Selection form .
Attachments form.
Composition
6.Drawing
269
________________
Select Drawing View Select the Drawing View Number that contains the
reference model attachments to be copied, and Accept
the drawing view.
Select Model Select only those models that should not be copied. All
unhighlighted reference models will be copied. Select
Accept to copy the specified models.
270
________________ Copy Another Drawing
6.7.1.2 Copy Another Drawing

This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It allows you to copy reference model
attachments from any drawing view in the project. First, the Drawing Types list displays.
After a drawing type is selected and accepted, the Drawing Selection list displays which
allows you to define models from a specific drawing model. After a drawing is selected and
accepted, the Drawing View Selection list displays. After a drawing view is selected and
accepted, the Copy Drawing View Attachments list displays which allows you to copy
models from the selected drawing views.
Commands
Field Descriptions
Selection form .
Attachments form.
Composition
6.Drawing
271
________________
Select Drawing Type Select the type of drawing to be copied.
Select Drawing Select the drawing that contains the reference model
attachments to be copied, and Accept the drawing.
Select Drawing View Select the Drawing View Number that contains the
reference model attachments to be copied, and Accept
the drawing view.
Select Model Select only those models that should not be copied. All
unhighlighted reference models will be copied. Select
Accept to copy the specified models.
272
________________ Attach Model
6.7.1.3 Attach Model

This option is used to attach reference models to specified drawing views.
Field Descriptions
Discipline Displays the disciplines available for you to select.
Area Displays the numbers that identify the areas found in the selected discipline.
Area Description Displays the description of the areas found in the selected
discipline.
Commands
Automatic Attach & Verify Automatically attaches reference files to the active
drawing view. It displays all the models within the project that have elements within
the clipping volume of the active drawing view. The system highlights the reference
models which are already attached.
Select Models / Attach by Area Controls method of model selection. When the
toggle is set to Select Models, the system will display the models with the drawing type
specified in the Project Setup command. The Attach by Area setting will attach all
reference models in the chosen area. If the Project Setup command was not used, the
system will display the model data categories that were active when each model was
created.
Select Discipline or Exit Select a discipline, and select Accept.

Composition
6.Drawing
273
________________
Select Area or Exit Select an area, and select Accept.
When the toggle is set to Select Models, the system will display the models
with the drawing type specified in the Project Setup command. The Attach
by Area setting will attach all reference models in the chosen area. If the
Project Setup command was not used, the system will display the model data
categories that were active when each model was created.
Select Model Select the model to attach to the drawing view.
274
________________ Automatic Attach & Verify
6.7.1.4 Automatic Attach & Verify

This option activates the Drawing View Ref Model Attachments form. It is used to
automatically attach reference files to the active drawing view. It displays all the models
within the project that have elements within the clipping volume of the active drawing view.
The system highlights the reference models which are already attached.
Commands
All Disciplines/Pre-Defined Disciplines The Pre-Defined Disciplines setting filters
the reference models by the discipline defined for the drawing type using the Project
Setup command. The All Disciplines setting displays all reference models in the
drawing view volume selected, regardless of the discipline.
Propogated / Sparse Models Only applicable for projects using ModelDraft, this
toggle limits the Automatic Attach / Verify form to show only propogated or sparse
models in the reference model display list. Propogated and sparse models cannot be
attached simultaneously, unless propogated and sparse graphics are included in the
same model.
Field Descriptions
Disc/Model Name Displays a list of the currently-attached models on the Reference
Models form.
Toggle (Pre-Defined/All) and Accept

Set the toggles to the appropriate settings.
Composition
6.Drawing
275
________________
Select Model Select the models from the displayed reference

file list.
Accept or Select Additional Models Accept the reference models to be attached to the
276
________________ Detach Model
6.7.1.5 Detach Model

This option is used to detach reference model attachments from a specified drawing view.
Field Descriptions
Disc/Model Number Displays the discipline and model number for currently-
attached models.
Description Displays the description for each of the currently-attached models.
Select Model Select the reference models to be detached from

the active drawing view.
Accept or Select Additional Models Accept the highlighted reference model as the
model to be detached, or select another model.
Composition
6.Drawing
277
________________
6.7.1.6 Reference Model Categories

This option activates the Model Categories form. It is used to review, revise, add, and
remove reference model categories for a selected view.
Commands
Review/Revise Reviews and revises the model categories (display levels) displayed
in a selected view.
Add Adds model categories (display levels) to a selected view.
Remove Removes model categories (display levels) from a selected view.
All Model Graphics Selects all categories on the display list to be either added or
removed, depending on the action being performed. This option is only applicable for
the Add and Remove commands.
Selected Model Only / All Piping Reference Restricts the system to use either the
selected model only, or all piping reference models.
Select View Select a view for which you want to revise the
reference model categories.
Select View or Revise Categories Select another view, or revise the active categories
in the display list. Active categories are
highlighted, and the selected action will be
performed on them when the form is accepted.
Placing a data point on a category that is currently
turned on will turn it off.
278
________________ Reference Model Categories
Accept or Select Categories Accept the current revisions, or make further

revisions to the status of the categories.
Composition
6.Drawing
279
________________
6.7.1.6.1 Review/Revise
This option is the default option on the Model Categories form. It is already selected when
the form is activated. It reviews and revises the model categories (display levels) displayed
for a selected view.
Commands
Select View Place a data point to identify the view to be

reviewed. All categories that are highlighted are
turned on for display.
Select View or Revise Categories Select another view, or revise the active categories
in the display list. Active categories are
highlighted, and the selected action will be
performed on them when the form is accepted.
Placing a data point on a category that is currently
turned on will turn it off.
Accept or Select Categories Accept the current revisions, or make further

revisions to the status of the categories.
280
________________ Add Category
6.7.1.6.2 Add Category

This option is used to add drawing categories for display in a selected view. You can specify
that all graphics be turned on for display, or that only specific categories be turned on.
Commands
All Model Graphics Activates all model graphics categories so that they will be
displayed.
Select View Place a data point to identify the view to display the
added categories.
Select Category Select the categories to turn on in the view.
Select View or Revise Categories Select another view, or select Restart and select
other categories to be added. Composition
6.Drawing
281
________________
6.7.1.6.3 Remove Category

This command removes the model categories that are turned on in a selected view. The
categories are removed (deactivated) by de-highlighting them.
Commands
All Model Graphics Turns off all model graphics categories so that they will not be
displayed.
Select View Place a data point to identify the view from which
to remove categories.
Select Category Select the categories to turn off in the view.
Select View or Revise Categories Select another view, or select Restart and select
other categories to be removed.
282
________________ Delete Drawing View
6.7.2 Delete Drawing View

This option deletes the selected drawing view (or composite drawing view).
Accept to Delete Drawing View Select Accept to delete the selected drawing view and
detach the MicroStation reference file attachments for
the drawing view.
Composition
6.Drawing
283
________________
6.7.3 Align Drawing View

This option enables you to align two or more existing (composed) drawing views using an
intelligent model graphic (such as a piping component or equipment nozzle) which is
common to all views.
Identify Item Place a data point to identify an item in one

of the drawing views to be aligned.
Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted item or

press <R> to reject the item and make
another selection.
Identify Drawing View to Align Snap to the border of the drawing view to
be aligned, or select the desired view from
the list on the form.
Accept/Reject Drawing View Press <D> to accept the highlighted item or

press <R> to reject the item and make
another selection. When the highlighted
item is accepted, the system displays two
intersecting dotted lines connecting the
identified component to the corresponding
component in the view to be aligned.
284
________________ Align Drawing View
An example of the intersecting lines is

shown in the following figure.
Accept/Reject Drawing View Alignment
Press <D> to accept the displayed drawing

view alignment, or press <R> to reject the
alignment and view an alternative
alignment. When the drawing view
alignment is accepted, the system
repositions the drawing view so that the
selected component is positioned at the
point of intersection of the displayed lines.
The system repeats the prompts until you

accept an alignment.
Composition
6.Drawing
285
________________
6.7.4 Revise View Data

This option activates the Revise Drawing View Data form. It is used to revise the clipping
volume and view scale of an existing drawing view (or composite drawing view) that has
already been composed. When revising composite drawing view data, the form contains
additional options for Orientation and Redefine Individual Views. Refer to Revise
Composite Drawing View Data, page 111 for more information.

The active drawing view must be selected on the Compose Drawing form.
Field Descriptions
View Number Displays the current number for the selected view. You can key in a
new one, if needed.
View Name Displays the current name for the selected view. You can key in a new
one, if needed.
View Scale Displays the current scale of the selected view. You can change the
scale by placing a data point in this field. The list of available scales will activate, and
you will be prompted to select the desired scale.
Drawing View Volume Displays the current clipping volume associated with the
Select Attribute for Revision Select any field on the form for revision.
286
________________ Revise View Data
You can rescale the drawing view by selecting the View

Scale field to activate the scale display list and selecting
a new scale value. The clipping limits are also scaled as
a result of this operation.
To revise any of the drawing view volume coordinates,

select the associated field and key in the new value.
You can key in a negative value to specify a westing,
southing, or elevation coordinate.
The drawing view in the following figure illustrates an

example of a revised clipping volume.
Specify Drawing View Scale Select a scale value from the display list.
When the view scale is revised, the system revises the scale in the Drawing View (or
Composite Drawing View) entity so that any drawing view scale displayable attribute labels
in the drawing for this drawing view can be updated. The system updates the clipping volume
for the active drawing view to reflect the new coordinate settings.
Composition
6.Drawing
287
________________
6.7.5 Revise Orientation

This option activates the Revise Orientation form. It is used to revise the orientation for the
active drawing view. The current orientation for the active drawing view is highlighted on the
form.

The active drawing view must be selected on the Compose Drawing form.
Field Descriptions
View Number Displays the number that identifies the active drawing view.
View Name Displays the name that describes the active drawing view.
Degrees Rotated Key in the number of degrees you want to rotate the view. This
field is only applicable when Rotated View is selected.
Commands
Rotate Drawing View: Model X, Model Y, Model Z Rotates the active drawing
view around either the X, Y, or Z axis. This option is only applicable when Rotated
View is selected.
Select Drawing View Orientation Select one of the seven orientations from the form to
specify the new orientation, or select Rotated View
to activate the Model X, ModelY, or Model Z
options. Then select an option to rotate the current
orientation.
288
________________ Revise Orientation
Keyin Angle (0-360) Key in the angle by which to rotate the drawing view
about the selected axis. Positive values will rotate
counter-clockwise, while negative values will rotate
clockwise.
If the rotated view does not fall into one of the seven standard orientations, the
orientation is displayed as Rotated View.
A revised orientation example for a drawing view is shown below.
Composition
6.Drawing
289
________________
6.7.6 Unassigned Views

This option is used to assign previously-created unassigned views to a drawing. You can
select a view to be composed from a displayed list. Any views selected from the list and left
uncomposed will be unassigned and available for later selection.

Unassigned drawing views must have been previously created with the Project Planner.
Refer to Project Planner, page 421 for more information about unassigned views.
Steps
1. Select the Unassigned Views option from the Compose Drawing form.
The system activates the Select Unassigned Views form which lists all the unassigned
views for each orientation.
2. Select the orientation of the unassigned view to be placed.
3. Select the view to be assigned.
4. Select Accept to return to the Compose Drawing form.
290
________________ Annotating Drawings
7. Annotating Drawings
Annotation
7.Drawing
These commands are used to place annotation graphics in the drawing to fully document the
drawing views. You can also update existing labels to reflect changes to the model.
Topics
Mass Annotation Automatically labels one drawing view at a time. ASCII files control
which object types are available for labeling, and how these objects are to be labeled.
Place Labels Activates a form that is a synthesis of the older Name Label and Coordinate
Label commands. If you prefer, you may still use the older Name Label and Coordinate
Label commands to place your labels.
Equipment Center Lines Automatically places center lines on equipment types that have
been designated to receive them. ASCII files control which object types receive centerline
labels, how these labels are placed.
Update Labels Updates displayable attribute drawing labels and coordinate labels to
agree with changes in the model. It can also be used to reposition labels or edit user-defined
text in a label.
Revision Markers Places a revision triangle or revision cloud on a drawing with the
specified type of revision marker to be placed.
Display Report Places a report in a drawing. It activates the Display Report form which
contains a list of the available drawing reports.
Place Cell Places a user-defined cell in a drawing.
Place Text and Line Places user-defined text and leader lines.
291
________________
Overlay Drawing Attaches another orthographic drawing as a reference file to the active
drawing to share drawing annotations between related drawings.
Review Attribute Displays the attribute values of the identified piping component or
segment, or of the selected equipment item or nozzle. It also displays selected attribute
information for MDR, HVAC, and raceway components. This option displays user data
associated with the identified element and PDS markers placed in the file.
Measure Distance Measures the distance between any two components, or inquires the
location of any component in terms of the projects Plant Coordinate System.
Drawing Annotation Symbology Updates the active line weight, symbology, color, and
text size values according to definitions made during project setup.
Name Label Selects the type of label to be placed. This command is used to place
annotation graphics, text, and labels on the drawing view.
Coordinate Label Selects the coordinate values to be labeled and to specify the form of
Automatic Labels Labels one or more drawing views automatically with the specified
type of label. It can also be used to label the contents of a fence and to define component
search criteria to restrict the elements to be labeled.
292
________________ Mass Annotation
7.1 Mass Annotation
Annotation
7.Drawing
The Mass Annotation command allows simple, automatic placement of annotation labels on
selected drawing views. You select from a list the drawing types and the objects to be
labeled, then you select the desired type of label for each object.

Both the Reference Data Manager and the Project Administrator modules have setup
issues that are concerned with the Mass Annotation command; both modules contain a form
used to control aspects of automatic label placement. The form used in the Label Library
Manager in PD_Data is used to control Mass Annotation settings for name labels, and the
form used in PD_Project controls Mass Annotation settings for coordinate labels.
This form allows you to specify the following options for use with the Mass Annotation
command in PD_Draw:
Are Previously Labeled Objects to be Labeled?
This option allows you to prevent labeling of objects that have already been labeled, if
desired. If the setting to re-label values that are incorrect is used, the system will update
the label value, then move on to the next label.
Are Objects Clipped by Drawing View Bounds to be Labeled?
Allows you to prevent labeling of objects only partially included within the drawing
view. An option is provided to label only objects whose labeling point is within the
bounds of the active drawing view.
293
________________
Are Objects Hidden by Other Objects to be Labeled?
Allows you to prevent labeling of objects that would not be partially or totally visible
after vector-hidden lines have been processed. Options include labeling of objects
whose labeling points are visible, not labeling partially-hidden objects, and not labeling
completely hidden objects.
Each label definition form in the Label Description Library of Reference Data Manager
has a Mass Annotation Data option. Refer to the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)
Reference Guide for more information.
A Mass Annotation Data option is also available while defining drawing seed data or
individual drawing files data in Project Administrator. Refer to the Project Administrator
(PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information.
The Mass Annotation command uses Code List 31 (Object Type) to control some aspects of
automatic label placement. The command is also dependent on the presence of the following
ASCII files in the project directory:
<yyy>_object.dwg (where yyy is eqp or in)
labels.<xxx> (where xxx is the numerical code-listed value of the drawing types being
annotated)
These files control which object types are to be labeled, and which types of labels are placed
on those drawing types. These files are described below, and sample files (applicable to
drawing type 665) are delivered to the project directory. You will need to create similar files
for each drawing type that you wish to be available in the Mass Annotation command.
Which object types in a given drawing view

will be available for labeling by users of the
Mass Annotation command?
The eqp_object.dwg file lists the equipment object types (ranging 120-140, as listed in
Standard Note 31: Object Type) for which the Mass Annotation command allows you to place
labels. The in_object.dwg file lists the instrumentation object types available to the Mass
Annotation command. Object types other than those listed in Standard Note 31 will not be
available for use by the Mass Annotation command.
These files also specify the equipment parametric form numbers for each object available for
Mass Annotation.
!Object Type Parametric Definition Forms

!-
120 A001,A003 !Equipment Platform
124 A051 !Equipment Handrail
128 A015,A016 !Equipment Penetration
130 A041 !Equipment Stair
135 A021,A031 !Equipment Ladder
140 A061,A063 !Equipment Davit
294
How will specific object types be labeled?

The labels.<xxx> files are named such that the file extensions are the numerical code-listed
Annotation
7.Drawing
values of the drawing types (from Standard Note 2000) being annotated. For instance, the
delivered sample labels.665 corresponds with the drawing type delivered as Piping
Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details because that drawing type is defined as code 665
in Standard Note 2000.
The labels.<xxx> files define which label numbers and search criteria apply to a particular
object type (from Standard Note 31) in the particular drawing type being annotated. For each
piping object type, there are two possible entries: one without search criteria and one with
search criteria defined in Report Manager (PD_Report).
For piping segments, only the longest segment for any given line ID will be
labeled.
Search criteria is valid only for piping object types. For more information on
creating search criteria, refer to Search Criteria Data Form, page 164.
The labels.<xxx> files follow the rules listed below:
Name labels are specified by the number given to them in the Label Description
Library.
Coordinate labels are specified the character C.
Labels can be placed individually or in combination according to the following

convention:
A comma (,) specifies single label placement; use a comma (,) between all single
label specifications. Examples: the string 2, 7, 10 specifies that name labels 2, 7,
and 10 are available for placement for that object type; the string 5, C specifies that
the single name label 5 and a coordinate label (designated later in this list as C) are
available for placement for that object type.
A dash (-) specifies the availability of all the labels in the given range. Example:
the string 10-15 specifies the availability of name labels 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15
for that particular object.
A plus (+) specifies the availability of a combined name label and coordinate label.
Example: the string 5, 12+C specifies availability of name label 5, and the
combination of name label 12 and a coordinate label.
Note that the coordinate label portion of a combination label may be

rejected by the Reject Label command, described later in this
chapter, but the entire combination label will be rejected if the name
label porton is rejected.
SC = specifies availability of labels for piping items matching the given search
criteria definition. Example: the string SC = YOUR_SEARCH_CRIT_NAME,
1, C specifies that all piping components meeting the given search criteria will
receive both a name label 1 and a coordinate label.
295
________________
The sample labels.665 file is listed below:
!Drawing Type = 665

!ObjectType Search Criteria Number Label Numbers
!-
!Piping Object Types
205 1 !Piping Segment
210 2, 7, 10-11, C !Piping Component
215 3 + C !Piping Specialty
217 8 !Pipes
220 13, 15 !Piping Support
250 5 !In-Line Instrument
255 5 !On-Line Instrument
260 5 !Off-Line Instrument
!Equipment Object Types
101 12 + C !Equipment Group
110 6, C !Equipment Nozzle
The information in the above sample file controls label placement for both piping and
equipment object types in drawings of type 665. For examples of the previously explained
convention, refer to the line describing the labels to be placed for piping object type 210:
210 2, 7, 10-11, C !Piping Component
This type of piping component can be annotated by name labels 2, 7, 10, 11, and a coordinate
label.
Options
Label Only Places the label only (no leader lines). When using this command and
the drag mode, the text for the label will be formed and displayed in drag mode. You
may then use the data button, or snap to existing graphics in the drawing to specify the
desired location of the label. You can cancel the label placement with the reset button.
(Coordinate label justification settings will be ignored when drag mode is enabled.)
Label Placement Options Determine placement of the labels text along the leader
line.
Above - Places the labels text above the leader line.
Below - Places the labels text below the leader line.
On - Places the labels text on the leader line, and places no character other than
those in the labels text.
296
[On] - Places the labels text on the leader line, and between brackets.
End - Places the labels text at the end of the leader line.
Annotation
7.Drawing
Justification Options (Just) Activates a palette of options used to set the position of
text relative to its origin.
These options are the PDS interface for automating the MicroStation Text Justification
feature. The letters on each button have the following meanings:
L = left
R = right
T = top
B = bottom
C = center
M = margin (applicable to multi-line labels only)
For example, select R M B to place the origin at the right margin on the bottom line of
text in a multi-line label, or select C C to place the origin at the absolute center of the
label.
Refer to the MicroStation documentation if you need more information

about text justification.
Text Size Defines the label text size. Select the active text size from the list box or
select Select From Label to set the active text size to that of an existing label.
Active Angle: Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle. Set
the With Active Angle/Along Leader Line toggle to With Active Angle.
297
________________
Horizontal Defines the orientation for the active label as horizontal.
Vertical Defines the orientation for the active label as vertical.
Reject Labeling Point Rejects the default labeling point on the object being labeled.
You will be prompted to specify a new labeling point.
Reject Label Rejects the label being placed, places a rejected label marker
indicating that the label has been rejected, and continues on to label the rest of the
selected objects. The system places rejected labels on a level 63 (delivered as Mass
Annotation Rejected Labels). The system, upon subsequent labeling operations, will
not attempt to replace a rejected label until the rejected label marker is deleted using the
Delete Element command.
Skip Current Label Bypasses the label being placed, and continues on to label the
rest of the selected objects. The system, upon subsequent labeling operations, will
attempt to place a label at this same point.
Continually selecting the Skip Current Label option will cycle through all possible
mass annotation label placement points.
Window Center to Item Shifts the window center to correspond with the placement
point of the active object, centering the object on your screen.
Active Working View Allows selection of the working view to be displayed. Select
the number of the view you wish to be the working view for annotation. The view
numbers are equivalent to the Microstation view numbers.
298
Steps
1. Select the Mass Annotation command from the Annotation palette.
Annotation
7.Drawing
The system displays the Drawing Bounds form and prompts you to select the desired
drawing view(s) to be annotated.
2. Select the desired drawing view(s) you wish to annotate, then Accept the highlighted
selections.
The system displays the Select Object and Label Type form and prompts you to select
an object type to be labeled.
299
________________
3. Select the object type to be annotated.
The system updates the form to display the object types available for mass annotation of
the selected drawing type and prompts you to select labels for that object type, or to
select another drawing type.
4. Select the appropriate labels for the object types to be annotated, then Accept the
highlighted selections and activate Mass Annotations Place Labels form. The system
processes the mass annotation data, and activates a variation of the Place Labels form.
You will be prompted to perform the next step in the label placement sequence for the
type of label being placed. (If leader lines are available for that type of label, you will
be prompted to place the second data point; the first label data point is label point 1 by
default, as defined for that equipment in the Equipment Modeling module.)
300
5. At this point you may modify, reject, or skip the active label. To place and accept a
label, place the desired data points to define the leader line, then Accept the active
label.
Annotation
7.Drawing
The system determines the next label placement point, and prompts you to perform the
next step in the label placement sequence.
The Mass Annotation command uses placement point 1 as the default

placement point for labels leader lines. You can override this setting during
placement.
301
________________
7.2 Place Labels

The Place Labels command is a synthesis of the older Name Label and Coordinate Label
commands found in previous versions of the Drawing Manager module. The Name Label
and Coordinate Label commands are still available for you to use if you so prefer.
Labels placed on equipment items that are not associated with a Datum Point
may not act as expected when the Update Labels command is used. If the
view scale is altered, or if the Datum Point is relocated, the label will maintain
its previous distance and relationship to the Datum Point.
Options
Label Only Places the label only (no leader lines). You can cancel the label
placement with the reset button.
line.
302
________________ Place Labels
Annotation
7.Drawing
Coordinate Sequence Displays the current sequence in which coordinate values

will be defined. The default sequence is Easting, Northing, Elevation. To change this
sequence, place a data point in this field; this activates a list of possible sequences for
you to choose from.
Select the desired sequence by placing a data point on it. Any coordinate labels created
prior to this enhancement will be considered by the Update Labels command to have
been defined as Easting, Northing, Elevation.
Supplementary Text Options You can specify that the coordinate label be created
with supplementary text. This text supplements the basic coordinate label, which
consists of the coordinate value, the coordinate axis short description, and the
coordinate system short description. The supplementary text can be placed as a prefix
or suffix.
Supplementary text may be edited or added in the drawings seed data (Type 63)
through the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator. Refer to the Project
Administrator Reference Guide for more information regarding supplementary text.
Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, or Elevation) to activate a display list of

special text options. If you select one of the Prefix or Suffix options, the system
prompts for the text.
The prefix and suffix text options are defined in the RDB. Refer to the Project Data
Manager section in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for
information on defining these values. Some of these options are only valid when
labeling a specific coordinate value, such as Bottom of Pipe and Elevation.
303
________________
Bottom of Pipe If you select Bottom Of Pipe as the prefix or suffix for an elevation
coordinate, the system indicates that this option is active and forces all coordinate labels
to have the elevation of the Bottom of Pipe. This option can only be activated when
selected in conjunction with the Prefix or Suffix for elevation.
Face of Flange If you select Face of Flange, the connect point location at the bolted
end of a piping item which is used for the coordinate readout is adjusted by one-half
gasket separation. For equipment nozzles, the datum point location is at the face-of-
flange, so it is not necessary to compensate for gasket separation. This command
verifies that you have selected a bolted end of a piping component, a pipe, an
instrument component, or a nozzle.
Top of Steel If you select Top of Steel, the coordinate value labeled is the highest
elevation of the structural member rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.
You may place a top-of-steel coordinate label using sparse model graphics. If you do
so, you must snap to a structural member for which the center line represents top-of-
steel.
Top of Concrete If you select Top of Concrete, the coordinate value labeled is the
highest elevation of the concrete rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.
Top of Platform If you select Top of Platform, the coordinate value labeled is the
elevation of the plane of the platform on which the grating or checkered plate is
supported.
If a structural model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following rules
will apply:
The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the structural component, rather
than the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be displayed if a
horizontal component is not identified in conjunction with this feature.
Update Labels will respect any changes made to the drawing view
definition or the platform which it describes.
If an equipment model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following rules
will apply:
The elevation option for the coordinates will be automatically enabled.
The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the equipments parametric
shape, rather than the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be
displayed if a horizontal component is not identified in conjunction with this feature.
Text Drag Off/On Defines if the label text is placed using drag mode or not. After
the leader line is placed, the text and any label enclosure is placed in drag mode.
Moving the text does not affect the leader line. To accept the placement of the dragged
text, select Accept.
304
________________ Place Labels
Def Line Style / Alt Line Style Set to designate use of the default or alternate line
style. The values for these line styles are defined in Project Data Manager. The
centerline style will be used as the alternate line style until you define this value
differently on the basis of label type in Project Data Manager.
Annotation
7.Drawing
Line Term Off/On Set to determine whether or not the witness line for a coordinate
label has a line terminator.
The line terminator specified in the RDB for coordinate labels is used if the
line terminator is on. If you choose a witness line without a line terminator, a
gap is left between the location being labeled and the end of the witness line.
The plot size of the gap is defined in the RDB.
Axis Lock On/Off When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock for
placement of coordinate labels with as many as four vertices. You can toggle this axis
lock while placing the vertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can be
locked to either the horizontal or vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segment
may not be locked to a drawing axis.
Activation of the axis lock limits you to a leader line with only two vertices, and
deactivation enables you to place a leader line with as may as four vertices.
Active Leader Line On/Off Set to On to place the leader line defined with the
Define Active Leader Line option. Set to Off to use the leader line defined in the label
description library for the selected label.
You can select an alternate line style for any leader line that is used as a centerline
extension without affecting name labels text, label enclosures, or line terminators.
Name Label Only/With Coordinate Label Toggle to place a name label only, or to
place a coordinate label and a name label as one operation. See Name Label, page 344
for more information. Both the coordinate label and the name label created with this
command can be updated using the Update Labels commands.
The text for the coordinate labels and the name labels are associated for move,
modify, and delete operations. However, the data structure of the combination
label distinguishes between the text for the coordinate label and the text for the
name label when updating the labels.
The text representing the name label is created on the MicroStation level
associated with the drawing category for name labels. The text representing
the name coordinate and the remaining graphics are created on the
MicroStation level associated with the drawing category for coordinate labels.
Add Label Below/Add Label Above Toggle used when placing name labels using
the With Name Label option to specify whether the name label is placed above or
below the coordinate label.
With Active Angle/Along Leader Line Set to With Active Angle to specify that
the label text be oriented along the active angle, or set to Along Leader Line to specify
that the text be oriented along the leader lines last segment.
305
________________
Coordinate label justification settings will be ignored when drag mode is

enabled.
L = left
R = right
T = top
B = bottom
C = center
label.

Text Size The Text Size fields display the text size that is to be used with the
selected label. When a label is selected, the text size fields are automatically populated
with the values that are to be used for that label. If the text size is read from the Label
Description Library or from the Type 63 data, the Text Size fields are read-only. If the
Text Size fields are populated with the active text size, the fields can be edited.
Active Angle Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle. Set
306
________________ Place Labels
Annotation
7.Drawing
Coordinate Label Disables name label options on the form.
Other Activates a list of other types of labels that may be placed.
The following four labels (between Coordinate Label and Other) are
defined per drawing type in the lab_button.dwg file during project setup.
This file resides in the project directory. A sample lab_button.dwg file
is shown below:
# This file maps the command buttons on the Label Placement

# form in the Place Label Command to a Label Number in the
# Label Description Library.
# There are a set of special labels described below that
# do not refer to a specific label number but a set of
# labels.
# Special Label Number
# SP1, "Piping Line Number"
# SP2, "Component Tag"
# SP3, "Piping Reducer"
# SP4, "Piping Piece Mark"
# You May define a Maximum of 4 Label Numbers per Drawing Type
# Define Drawing Type to Which Buttons Apply
# Define Label Numbers and Text for Buttons

# Label Number, Text to Display on Button
# (MAXIMUM of 20 Characters)
DrawingType=641 ! Plot Plans
307
________________
12, "Equipment Number"

14, "Structural ID"
50, "Dwg View Name"
52, "Dwg View Scale"
DrawingType=643 ! Equipment Arrangement Drawings

6, "Nozzle Number"
50, "Dwg View Name"
52, "Dwg View Scale"
DrawingType=665
SP1, "Piping Line Number"

5, "Instr. Tag Number"
6, "Nozzle Number"
DrawingType=731 ! Instrument Location Plans
SP1, "Piping Line Number"

5, "Instr. Tag Number"
6, "Nozzle Number"
As shown in the sample file, the DrawingType=xxx line (where xxx is

the drawing type number found in Standard Note 2000) begins a button
definition for a drawing type. You may define up to 4 buttons per
drawing type by using the label type number from the Label Description
Library, followed by a comma (,), followed by the desired button text in
quotes.
If a drawing type is not defined in the lab_button.dwg file, the following

default buttons (the SPx buttons listed in the lab_button.dwg file above)
are used:
SP1: Component Tag
SP2: Line Number Label
SP3: Place Flow Arrow
SP4: Piping Piecemark
Four buttons will always be present on the form in this area. Defining fewer than 4
buttons per drawing view will result in the defaults listed above being used for the
unspecified buttons.
For example, defining only two buttons for a drawing type will result in the 2 user-
specified buttons, plus the remaining default Place Flow Arrow and Piping Piecemark
buttons being available on the form..
Nozzle Number Places a nozzle number label. You will be prompted to identify the
nozzle being labeled.
308
________________ Place Labels
Piping Line Number Places a piping line number label. You will be prompted to
identify the line being labeled.
Equipment Number Places an equipment number label. You will be prompted to
Annotation
7.Drawing
snap to the equipment item being labeled.
Instrument Tag Number Places an instrument tag number label. You will be
prompted to identify the instrument being labeled.
Category Type Options Allows selection of specific label category types for label.
Options include Piping/Equipment, Electrical Raceway, Structural, PLANTGEN,
Miscellaneous, Drawing View, and User Input.
The types of labels listed in each option depend on settings in the Label
Description Library in the Reference Data Manager module.
Refer to the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide for

more information on Label Description Library and setting up labels.
More information on these options can also be found at Name Label,
page 344 .
Specific Labels Allows placement of specific label types. Options include Piping
Line Number, Component Tag, Piping Reducer, Piping Piecemark, Flow Arrow,
Drawing View Scale, and Drawing View Name labels.
Define Active Leader Line Defines a leader line as the leader line used when the
Active Leader Line toggle is set to On, the system automatically places the defined
active leader line with the label.
Move Label Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or
move just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial
is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. For example, if a
label consists of at least one coordinate value and a name label, you may move the
name label, and leave the coordinate value(s) in the current position. The default
setting for this toggle is Move Entire.
After setting the toggle to the desired position, place a data point or snap to identify the
label to be moved. You can move a specified label or a label and any associated
graphics to a new location using drag mode. The system highlights the identified label
(and optionally all associated graphics, such as the leader line).
Place a second data point to place the label at the new location.
This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label
placed.
Move Text Only Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire text,
or move just a single text element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move
Partial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. The
default setting for this toggle is Move Entire.
309
________________
After setting the toggle to the desired position, select and place a data point or snap to
identify the text label to be moved. This option works the same as the Move Entire
Label option except that only the label is moved, and the leader line graphics remain in
place. The system puts the text only in raster drag.
placed.
Modify Label This option provides the features of the Move Label option and the
MicroStation Modify Element command. Select and place a data point or snap to
identify the label to be modified.
placed.
Snap lock and text drag modes are automatically activated with this command, and they
are restored to their previous values when exiting this command by any means. Also,
this option respects the Place No Leader/Place Leader Line, Line Terminator
ON/OFF, and Default/Alternate Line Style options on the basis of the label identified,
regardless of the previous status of these options. These options will be restored to their
previous settings upon the command being exited by any means.
If a label was placed with a leader line or a line terminator, you can delete the existing
leader line or terminator by disabling the appropriate option. By default, deleting a
leader line will automatically delete its terminator, if one exists. If the label does not
include a leader line, you can place one by enabling the Place Leader Line option.
When placing a leader line, the first point for the leader line will be the "key point" of
the component used in initially creating the label. You will be prompted for the
remaining vertices of the leader line.
For "combination" labels that contain a coordinate label and a name label, the leader
line and terminator will assume the symbology associated with the label you select.
If text drag mode is enabled, the text will be placed in drag mode for you to re-position
once you accept the leader line. If drag mode is disabled, the location of the text for the
label will not be revised as part of adding the leader line.
You can revise the active angle for the text or drag the identified label, leader line or
two segments of a leader line by their vertex to the desired destination and place a data
point. You can move the text with the label enclosure graphics, if applicable. The
leader line segment closest to the text rubber-bands, stretching until the next data point
is placed.
If you snap near a vertex, the segments joined by it are moved together to the next data
point placed. If you snap to the text part of the label, the label is moved from the
nearest vertex. If you snap to a point along a segment of a leader line, the leader line is
moved. If you snap to the leader line or the vertex of the leader line closest to the text,
both the leader line and the text are moved.
310
________________ Place Labels
If the orientation of the active label is revised, subsequent labels identified will
automatically be rotated to that orientation.
This option maintains the associativity between the location of the label in the drawing
Annotation
7.Drawing
and the location of the component in the model being labeled.
You can press <R> to redefine the vertices of the leader line, and select Accept on the
displayed leader line.
Delete Element Deletes entire or selected elements of name or coodinate labels.

This option activates a Delete Entire / Delete Partial toggle. Set the toggle to entire or
partial, select the label to be deleted, then perform a data-button search to identify the
element to be deleted. Then, press <D> to accept the element, or press <R> to reset.
placed.
If a combination label (consisting of multiple text elements) is selected,

you may delete a single text element.
This command also deletes rejection markers placed by the Mass

Annotation command.
Edit Text This option allows you to edit the part of a label that was entered directly
at placement. You will be prompted to identify the label that you wish to edit.
The Edit Text command will edit user defined text but will not resize
the label enclosure if placed with the User Input label type. If the label
is to be edited, the correct steps would be to delete the label and replace
it with the correct text. The new label enclosure will be sized correctly.
The deletion step is not needed if the user defined label does not include
a label enclosure.
Refer to Edit Text, page 325 for more information.
Add Coordinate Label Select and place a data point or snap to identify the
previously created name label to be used for adding a coordinate label. (Do not identify
the component being labeled.) Then, Accept to place the specified name label. The
system automatically creates the coordinate label relative to the witness line of the
identified name label and associates the two labels. Both the name label and the
coordinate label can be updated by using the Update Labels command. The text for
the coordinate label and the text for the name label are associated for move, modify, and
delete operations.
Add Name Label Select and place a data point or snap to identify a previously
created label to be used for creating a name label. (Do not identify the component
being labeled.) Then, Accept to place the name label. The system automatically
creates the name label and associates the two labels. Both labels can be updated by
using the Update Labels command. The text for the two labels are associated for
move, modify, and delete operations.
311
________________
See Name Label, page 344 for more information.
Steps
1. Select the Place Labels command from the Update Labels palette.
The system activates the Place Label form, and prompts you to select the desired
labeling option.
2. Select the desired type of label, then select any additional options you wish to use to
modify the label being placed. For example, you may select the sequence of coordinate
display for coordinate labels; you can also adjust the text size, justification, and
termination options for name and coordinate labels. After selecting the desired label
and its settings, Accept the selections.
You will be prompted to identify the coordinate location or element which you wish to
label.
3. Identify the coordinate location or element which you wish to label.
For labels which allow line terminators, you will be prompted to specify all remaining
vertices for the line terminator. When all terminator vertices have been specified, you
will be prompted to accept the leader line or reset the form.
4. Specify all remaining vertices for the line terminator, then Accept the selections.
The system places the label, and prompts you to select another label to be placed.
312
________________ Equipment Centerlines
7.3 Equipment Centerlines
Annotation
7.Drawing
This command activates the Place/Revise Equipment Centerlines form, which lets you place
or revise centerline labels for equipment items in orthogonal views. This command is limited
to the labeling of parametrics only; equipment obects defined as primitives will not be
labeled.
Parametrics with primitives added to them will be labeled by this command.
Centerlines will only be placed in orthogonal views. They will be placed for equipment
which has been rotated about one axis (or not rotated at all), but equipment which has been
rotated about two axes will not receive centerline labels.
Centerline labels behave like any other kind of labels; they have associativity with respect to
the equipment group to which they apply. This means that they respect the Update Labels
command in the following situations:
If the equipment group is moved, the centerline will be moved when the Update Labels
command is next used.
If the equipment group is deleted, the centerline will be deleted when the Update
Labels command is next used.
The Update Labels command will not be respected for centerline labels in the following
situations:
If the equipment group has been rotated since the label was placed.
313
________________
If the parametric form for equipment group has been modified (after equipment
placement).
If either of the above situations occurs after centerline label placement, you will need to delete
and replace the centerlines for the applicable equipment groups.

Before the Equipment Centerlines command can be used, the eqp_center.dwg file must be
edited to control centerline placement according to your specifications.
The eqp_center.dwg file (delivered to the project directory) controls which equipment objects
receive centerline labels. In addition to listing the objects which may be labeled with this
command, this file also specifies the following attributes:
Which views of the objects will be labeled.
Multiple centerlines for specified objects.
Which data points on the equipment object through which the centerline label will be
placed.
The direction of the centerline.
The length of centerline labels extension beyond the graphical extents of the equipment
object.
The symbology of the centerline label.
A sample eqp_center.dwg file is excerpted below:
UNIT= INCH
!Form View CL DP Annotation

!No Type No No Direction Extension Category
!
E205 ST 1 DP1 SNS 0.375 3 ! top
2 DP1 SEW 0.375 3
PS 1 DP1 VERT 0.375 3 ! side
PT 1 DP1 VERT 0.375 3 ! front
E210 ST 1 DP1 SNS 0.375 3 ! top

2 DP1 SEW 0.375 3
E215 ST 1 DP1 SNS 0.375 3 ! top

2 DP1 SEW 0.375 3
314
Using the first equipment type shown as an example, each field in the file format will be
described.
The presence of the parametric form number of a given equipment type (form number E205 in
Annotation
7.Drawing
this example) specifies that the command will recognize all equipment objects of that type as
recipients of a centerline label.
UNIT= INCH
!Form View CL DP Annotation

!No Type No No Direction Extension Category
!
E205 ST 1 DP1 SNS 0.375 3 ! top
2 DP1 SEW 0.375 3
Each line of the file describes how centerline labels will be placed for one view of that
equipment parametric. To place more than one centerline in that view, simply add another
row of keywords under the same parametric form number as shown in the example above.
The rest of the fields in the file are explained below.
Field Description
UNIT= The units of measure that will apply to the centerline extension
values. The possible values for this field are INCH for inches, and
MM for millimeters.
Form No The equipment parametric form number from which centerlines are
being defined. Each parametric form number in this file can receive
centerline labels. This field will be empty if this line describes the
second (or more) centerline definition for that equipment parametric
form number.
View Type The type of object view (top, side and end view) for which
centerlines are being defined. The keywords Primary (P), Secondary
(S), and Tertiary (T) describe the axis of the equipment placement
orientation tee. For example, PS is the plane that includes the
primary and secondary axis of the equipment group. This field will
be empty if this line describes the second or third centerline for a
given equiupment form in a given drawing view.
CL No The number of the centerline being specified by this row of the file.
The first (or only) centerline for the given view of this parametric
form number is number 1, and the second centerline for that drawing
view is specified by the number 2.
DP No The datum point through which the centerline will be placed. For
example, DP1 will be the datum point 1 of equipment.
315
________________
Direction Direction of centerline. The possible values for this field are:
PNS Plant north-south
PEW Plant east-west
SNS Site north-south
SEW Site east-west
EPT Equipment primary tee
EST Equipment secondary tee
ETT Equipment tertiary tee
HOR Horizontal
VERT Vertical
NORMAL-CLi
Normal to previously defined centerline number i in the
same view type, where normal is the plane of the view
type being defined. A dash (-) is required between the
NORMAL and CLi keywords.
DPi-DPj Parallel to a vector from DPi to DPj, where the DP values

correspond to data points on equipment items.
Extension The default length that the centerline should extend beyond the
graphic range of the equipment being labeled.
Annotation category
The user-defined drawing annotation category number that applies to
the centerline graphic symbology. The User-Defined Drawing
Annotation Category Data option in the Project Data Manager
command of the Project Administrator (PD_Project) module of PDS
controls graphic symbology. The number placed in this field should
correspond with the listed position of the category assigned to
centerline graphics. For example, the centerline graphic category in
the project from which the sample file was taken is the third category
in the list of user-defined drawing annotation categories, which
means that it is number 3.
Any text preceded by an exclamation point (!) will not be processed by the
system; this allows users to place comments inside the file.
316
Commands
Place Centerlines by View Prompts you to select the view to be processed by the
Annotation
7.Drawing
command. Select the view, then select Accept to place centerlines for that view.
Place Centerlines by Group Activates an Equipment Number field, which allows

you to specify the number of the equipment upon which you wish to place centerlines.
Key in the desired equipment number or snap to the desired equipment, then select
Accept to place centerlines for the specified equipment in all drawing views.
Extend Centerline Allows you to extend the centerlines that have been placed.
After selecting this command, place a data point on the centerline that you wish to
extend. Move the end of the centerline label to the desired location, then place a second
data point to accept the new centerline extension.
Delete Centerline Allows deletion of the existing centerlines. After selecting this
command, snap to the equipment containing the centerline which you wish to delete.
Select Accept (or place a data point) to delete the selected centerline.
Delete Element Allows deletion of existing label elements. After selecting this
command, place a data point on the label element which you wish to delete, then place a
second data point to accept deletion of that element.
placed.

Steps
1. Select the Equipment Centerlines command from the Annotation palette.
The system activates the Place/Revise Equipment Centerlines form and promts you to
select the drawing view for which you wish to place centerline labels. (The default
action for the Place/Revise Equipment Centerlines form is Place Centerlines by
View.)
2. Select the view for which you wish to place centerline labels. Select Accept to place
centerlines on all equipment groups allowed in the view
OR
Specify the desired equipment group by using the Place Centerline by Group option,
then select Accept to place centerlines on the specified equipment group.
317
________________
3. Use the remaining commands to modify or delete existing centerline labels as

necessary.
318
________________ Update Labels
7.4 Update Labels
Annotation
7.Drawing
This command activates the Update Labels form used to update displayable attribute drawing
labels and coordinate labels to reflect changes in the model. Labels can be updated by
selected view or by identifying a specific label in the view. This option is also used to
reposition, modify, delete, and partially edit or completely replace user-defined labels.
This command does not delete associative name labels or coordinate labels when both of the
following conditions have been met:
The range of the component in the model continues to intersect the volume of the
corresponding drawing view.
The range of the name or coordinate label (including the text and the leader line)
continues to intersect the space within the drawing that is enclosed by the
corresponding drawing views skeleton.
The Update Labels command updates name labels on the basis of the Reference Database
under any of the following conditions:
When changes to the applicable alphanumeric data in the model have been made.
When changes to the definition of the format for that name label type in the Label
Description Library have been made.
When the label attributes listed in the Label Graphic Data form of the Label
Description Library are modified. Such items include line weight, line style, color,
character size, and several other label attributes.
When the definition of the label enclosure for that name label type was revised in the
Label Description Library.
When the selection of underlining for the text within that name label type has been
revised in the Label Description Library. For instance, if the name label was created at
a time when the Label Description Library specified no underlining for the labels text,
but the definition has been changed, the name label is updated. If the text for the name
label was created with underlining and the Label Description Library has been revised,
the name label is updated. In all cases when the underlining option has been enabled,
the length of the underlining will be corrected when the length of text within the
applicable name label is updated.
When one of the labeled attributes (such as a coordinate) has been changed.
Equipment must be defined with a datum point for labels to update on

primitive graphics.
The Update Labels command also updates equipment centerlines placed with the Equipment
Centerlines command. It will update the centerline position if an equipment group has been
moved or deleted. It will not update the centerlines for a group that has been rotated, or if a
modification has been made to the corresponding parametric form. In either of these cases,
the centerline should be deleted and replaced after the modification.
319
________________
Selecting the Restart command near the top of the form will highlight all
available views. Otherwise, you may select the desired view(s) from list on
the form, or you will be prompted to identify them in the drawing.
Commands
Create Revision Labels/Do NOT Create Revision Labels Controls the creation of
revision labels. If this option is activated, the system will maintain a copy of any name
or coordinate label that is updated or deleted. These revision labels can be displayed
inside revision clouds or revision triangles on orthographic drawings.
When this option is enabled, a copy of the previous version of the name or coordinate
label is made in the following instances:
The text for a name or coordinate label is updated in the drawing on the basis of
changes in the database or movement of the labelled component.
A name or coordinate label is deleted in the drawing because the labelled component
has been deleted from the model.
The label format has been changed during the project life cycle.
Update Labels cannot distinguish between a label being moved as a

result of a component being moved in the model and a label being
moved because a drawing view was repositioned for the sake of drawing
composition. Therefore, if you select this option after moving a drawing
view, all name and coordinate labels will be copied as updated labels.
The revision labels will be identical to the drawing labels except that:
320
The weight for a revision management label will be two (2) greater than the weight of
the corresponding drawing label.
The color of a revision management label will be zero (typically white).
Annotation
7.Drawing
They will be assigned to the same drawing category as defined for the "hidden" vector-
hidden-line graphics for that drawing view. This will allow creation and deletion of
these labels to be managed according to drawing view.
Only the labels text will be copied as a revision management label; the leader line and
any enclosures will not.
Since a drawing can have no more than 64 drawing categories, it is

necessary to share the category for the optional "hidden" vector-hidden-
line graphics. Because of this, users should coordinate creation and
deletion of hidden graphics with the use of revision management labels.
Axis Lock Off/On When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock for
placement of labels in a drawing. You can toggle this axis lock while placing the
vertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can be locked to either the
horizontal or vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segment may not be locked
to a drawing axis.
Update Selected Views Updates all the labels in the specified view.
Update Single Labels Updates the specified drawing label(s) to reflect the current
status of the model.
Move Entire Label Repositions the drawing label(s) in the drawing view, but does
not update the text. Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label,
or to move just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements.
If Move Partial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved.
For example, if a label consists of at least one coordinate value and a name label, you
may move the name label, and leave the coordinate value(s) in the current position. The
Move Text Only Repositions the drawing label text in the drawing view. Set the
Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or move just a single
element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, only
the text element identified by the user will be moved. The default setting for this toggle
is Move Entire.
placed.
321
________________
placed.
is placed.
You can press <R> to redefine the vertices of the leader line, and Accept the displayed
leader line.

322
placed.
Annotation
7.Drawing

Annotation command.
Delete Revision Labels Deletes revision management labels from all or selected
drawing views. Place a data point on the drawing view containing revision
management labels to be deleted. The selected drawing view will be highlighted. To
select all drawing views, place a data point on each one. When the form is accepted, the
revision management labels for the selected drawing view(s) will be deleted.
Although revision management labels share the drawing category with

"hidden" vector-hidden-line graphics, deleting revision management
labels will not affect the "hidden" vector-hidden-line graphics.
However, re-creating vector hidden-line graphics will delete all graphics
on that level, including revision management labels, for the active view.
Revise Text Select to completely replace user-defined label text. Refer to Revise
Text, page 324 for more information.
Edit Text Select to partially edit that part of the user-defined text in the label.
Refer to Edit Text, page 325 for more information.
Accept/Select Update Labels option

Select the desired option from the bottom of the form.
The move options are used to reposition the drawing
label(s) in the drawing view, but do not update the text.
Snap lock mode is automatically activated with this command and the previous
snap lock mode is restored when exiting this command by any means. This
option provides the features of the Move Entire Label option and the
MicroStation Modify Element command.
Identify Label (Data Btn or Snap)

Place a data point on (or snap to) the desired label.
Identify Element or Accept for Last Label

Place a data point on the element of the label to be
deleted.
323
________________
7.4.1 Revise Text

This option completely replaces the part of the label that is user-defined text. This option is
also used to replace text in a non-associative label which was created with the MicroStation
Place Text command. You cannot revise labels which are completely formed from attribute
data or predefined text.
Steps
1. Select the Revise Text option from the Update Labels form.
2. Identify Label (Data Btn or Snap)
Place a data point or snap to identify the label to be revised.
3. User Defined Text Label - Keyin Text
Key in the text string to replace the user-defined portion of the identified label.
If the name label being revised is associative, the system re-prompts for the text. The
system substitutes the entered text for the user-defined part of the label. The label is
re-formed based on the attribute data and the label definition in the Label Description
Library.
An error message is displayed if the label text was created from

formatted attribute data and predefined text.
For associative name labels, this requires a change to the data structure of the label in
order to include the position and length of the user-specified text within the label.
324
________________ Edit Text
7.4.2 Edit Text
Annotation
7.Drawing
This option is used to edit partially a part of the user label. It cannot be used to edit text in a
non-associative label created with the Place Text command. This command does not replace
any text formed from attribute data or predefined text.
Steps
1. Select the Edit Text option from the Update Labels form.
2. Identify Label (Data Btn or Snap)
Place a data point or snap to identify the label to be edited.
3. Keyin text to be replaced in label
Key in the text string to be replaced from the user-defined portion of the identified
label.
4. Keyin replacement text
Key in the text string to replace the specified string, and select Accept to process the
specified edit.
If the name label being edited is a user-input associative label, the system prompts for a
substring to search in the labels text and the substring with which it is to be replaced.
Only a substring of the user-defined part of the label is substituted through this option.
It does not replace any text formed from attribute data or predefined in the Label
Description Library.
For named labels, only name labels with a user-defined attribute defined as part of the
label in the Label Description Library can be edited with this command.
You can use MicroStation commands to delete or add graphics to the label as
long as the additions are added to the label graphic group.
325
________________
7.5 Revision Markers

This command activates the Revision Markers form, and is used to place a revision triangle
or revision cloud on a drawing.

The graphic parameters for the revision triangle or revision cloud must be previously defined
in the Label Description Library. Label number 205 is reserved for revision triangles.
Refer to the Create Label Graphic Data section in the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)
Reference Guide to define the graphic parameters. The PDS Drawing Annotation Category
Data section in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide defines the color
codes and line weights.
Commands
Draw Revision Cloud Defines the type of revision marker as cloud.
Draw Revision Triangle Defines the type of revision marker as a triangle.
Move Label Select and place a data point or snap to identify the label to be moved.
You can move a specified label or a label and any associated graphics to a new location
using drag mode. The system highlights the identified label (and optionally all
associated graphics, such as the leader line).
placed.
326
________________ Revision Markers
Steps
1. Select the Revision Markers command.
Annotation
7.Drawing
The system activates the Revision Markers form.
2. Select Revision Option
Select the type of revision marker to be placed from the Revision Markers form. To
place a revision triangle, go to step 3.
OR
To place a revision cloud, complete steps 4 through 7.
3. Specify Triangle Location
Place a data point to specify the location for the revision triangle to be placed on the
drawing view.
The system places a triangle at the specified location and places the drawing revision
number (retrieved from the drawing RDB) in the triangle.
4. Specify Arc Start Point
Place a data point to indicate the starting point for the first arc in the cloud.
5. Specify Arc Curvature
Place a data point to indicate a point on the arc.
6. Specify Arc End Point
Place a data point to indicate the end point for the arc.
The system displays the defined arc.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to define all the arcs which form the cloud.
A revision cloud is treated as a closed element. When you snap to the initial start point
for the end point of an arc, the placement is complete.
327
________________
7.6 Display Report

This command activates the Display Report form. It contains a list of reports for the active
project. You can display a report by selecting it from the list, and the report can be placed in a
drawing using the Place Report in Drawing option.
Graphic parameters such as color, weight, and character size for the report can
be set in the Project Data Manager under graphic symbology data for
drawings.
Commands
Move Element Moves a placed cell.
Delete Element Deletes a placed cell.
Steps
1. Select the Display Report command from the panel menu.
2. The system displays the Display Report form with a list of the reports.
3. Select Report
Select the report to be displayed from the list on the Display Report form.
4. Accept or Select Other Report
Accept the highlighted report, select another report. The system displays the report on
the Display Report form.
328
________________ Display Report
Annotation
7.Drawing
You can view the displayed report by using the arrows in the center of the form to move
left and right and the scroll bar to move up and down.
5. Select the Select Another Report option to redisplay the report list for selection and
display of another report.
OR
Select the Place Report in Drawing option from the Display Report form to place the
displayed report in the drawing view.
6. Key in the required Max Blank Lines and Space Factor values.
When you generate a report, there can be sections with blank lines. Max Blank Lines
limits the number of blank lines to the specified value when you place the report in a
drawing. Space Factor sets the spacing between the lines in the report. The default
spacing is set in Project Administrator.
329
________________
Select the desired Report Position to specify the report placement parameters. These
parameters set the justification when you place the report in a drawing.
7. Data Button will Place Report
Place a data point in the drawing view to specify the location of the report being placed.
The justification is from the data button in the view.
330
________________ Place Cell
7.7 Place Cell
Annotation
7.Drawing
This command is used to place user-defined cell into a drawing. The cells name, which does
not display in the form, and the cells description needs to be defined in a Drawing
Annotation Cells List, dwg_cell_list, in the project directory. Each cell name, followed by the
description, must be on a separate line and at least one space must separate the cell name from
the description. The description is limited to 60 characters. Blank lines and comment lines
beginning with an exclamation point (!) in the first column may be placed anywhere in this
library.
Because cells placed with MicroStation do not respect the PD_Draw pre-defined
category settings, attempting to move or delete cells placed through MicroStation may
cause unpredictable results. It is recommended that all desired cells be added to the
PD_Draw cell library (and added to the dwg_cell_list file) and placed through the
PDS Place Cell command.
Commands
Move Element Moves a placed cell.
Delete Element Deletes a placed cell.
Field Descriptions
Active Scale Key in the active scale for the cell.
Active Angle Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle.
Horizontal Defines the orientation for the cell as horizontal.
331
________________
Vertical Defines the orientation for the cell as vertical.
Steps
1. Select the Place Cell command.
The Place User Cell form displays.
2. Select the cell to place.
3. Define the Active Scale and Active Angle if you want.
4. Place the cell in the drawing.
332
________________ Place Text and Line
7.8 Place Text and Line
Annotation
7.Drawing
This command is used to place user-defined text labels that are not associated with data from
the RDB. You define the text to be displayed, as well as the following text (and line)
attributes to be used for display:
Drawing category
Line Style
Line Weight
Text Height
Text Width
Text Weight
Orientation
Until the default values for these attributes have been set in Project Data
Manager, the weight value for lines and other graphics will be applied to text.
Remember that changes made to the text and line attribute values will only
apply for text and lines placed immediate following the change. Once another
drawing category is selected, any changes made to the text and line attribute
values will no longer be active.
333
________________
Commands
Line Style Determines the active line style. If selected, this option activates a
graphic display of line styles for you to select from. Select the desired line style, and it
will replace the currently-displayed line style.
Justification Options Activates a palette of options used to set the position of text
relative to its origin.
L = left
R = right
T = top
B = bottom
C = center
label.

Horizontal/Vertical Places the text parallel to the horizontal or vertical plane.

(These options are mutually exclusive.)
Place Line Active Angle Places a line with user-defined endpoints at the active
angle.
Place Line Places a line with user-defined endpoints at the angle determined by the
endpoints.
Place Text Prompts for the user-defined text, then places it at the active angle at the
point selected.
334
________________ Place Text and Line
Move Element Allows movement of selected elements. Place a data point on the
element to be moved, then move the element to the desired location. Place a second
data point to select the new location of the element, then hit the Reject/Reset button to
accept the new placement and finish the operation.
Annotation
7.Drawing
Delete Element Allows deletion of selected elements. Place a data point on the
element to be deleted, then place a second data point to accept the deletion of the
selected element.
Field Descriptions
Active Angle Displays the current active angle at which the text (and line, if
applicable) will be displayed.
Enter Text Accepts the user-defined text that will be placed. This field will display
up to 40 characters at once, although more can be entered into the field.
Weight Displays the current line weight value. Placing a data point on this field will
allow a different value to be entered.
Text Height Displays the current text height value. Placing a data point on this field
will allow a different value to be entered.
Text Width Displays the current text width value. Placing a data point on this field
Text Weight Displays the current text weight value. Placing a data point on this
field will allow a different value to be entered.
Select Category Select the category to which the text and line attributes
will be assigned.
335
________________
7.9 Overlay Drawing

This command attaches another orthographic drawing as a reference file to the active drawing
to share drawing annotation between related drawings.
Only the drawing annotation categories from the overlay drawing is displayed. Category
display changes made using the Drawing Categories command for the active drawing also
updates any overlaid drawings.
Steps
1. Select the Overlay Drawing command.
The Overlay Drawing Annotation form displays.
Select a drawing type from the list and Accept.
A list of available drawings for that drawing type displays.
336
________________ Overlay Drawing
Annotation
7.Drawing
3. Select Drawing(s) and Accept
Select the drawings to overlay and Accept.
337
________________
7.10 Review Attribute

This command activates the Review Attribute form. It is used to display the attribute values
of the identified piping component or segment, attribute values of the selected equipment
item, and attribute values of the selected equipment nozzle. It displays information on the
selected attribute for ModelDraft, HVAC, and raceway components. It also reviews the user
data associated with the element and the information associated with the PDS markers placed
in the model.
Steps
1. Select the Review Attribute command from the Annotation palette.
The system activates the Review Attributes form.
2. Identify Element
The system displays the attribute values from the database for the selected element.
338
________________ Measure Distance
7.11 Measure Distance
Annotation
7.Drawing
This option activates the Measure Distance form, used to for measuring distances between
any two components (piping, equipment, structural, etc.) or inquiring the location of any
component in terms of the projects Plant Coordinate System.
Commands
Reference Point Select this option to define from which point to start measuring
from.
Keypoint Snap / Project Snap If set to Keypoint Snap, tentative points go to the
nearest element keypoint. The number of element keypoints can be changed using the
ky= MicroStation key-in. If set to Project Snap, tentative points connect to the
element where they are placed.
Measurement Point Defines the point being specified as the point to measure to.
Field Descriptions
Delta Easting Displays the easting distance between the two points.
Delta Northing Displays the northing distance between the two points.
Delta Elevation Displays the elevation distance between the two points.
Absolute Displays the actual distance between the two points.
339
________________
Steps
1. Select the Measure Distance command from the bar menu.
The Measure Distance form displays.
2. Define the Keypoint Snap / Project Snap toggle.
3. Specify Reference Point or Select Other Option
Identify the point to measure from.
The Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates of the reference point displays in the
left message field.
4. Enter Measurement Point or Select Other Option
Identify the point to measure to.
The Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates of the measurement point displays in
the right message field. The distance between the two points displays.
340
________________ Drawing Annotation Symbology
7.12 Drawing Annotation

Symbology
Annotation
7.Drawing
This option activates the Drawing Annotation Symbology form. It is used to update the
active line weight, symbology, color, and text size values by selecting from the displayed list.
This command can be used to more easily control the graphic parameter setup prior to the
creation of miscellaneous drawing annotation using MicroStation placement commands.
You can use Project Manager to specify the named category and the associated graphic
parameters (including line terminator, text font, and text line spacing) in the Reference
Database.
Until the default values for these attributes have been set in Project Data
Manager, the weight value for lines and other graphics will be applied to text.
Remember that changes made to the text and line attribute values will only
apply for text and lines placed immediate following the change. Once another
drawing category is selected, any changes made to the text and line attribute
values will no longer be active.
Commands
341
________________
L = left
R = right
T = top
B = bottom
C = center
label.

Line Style Determines the active line style. If selected, this option activates a
graphic display of line styles for you to select from. Select the desired line style, and it
will replace the currently-displayed line style.
Field Descriptions
Weight Displays the current line weight value. Placing a data point on this field will
allow a different value to be entered.
Text Height Displays the current text height value. Placing a data point on this field
Text Width Displays the current text width value. Placing a data point on this field
Text Weight Displays the current text weight value. Placing a data point on this
field will allow a different value to be entered.
342
________________ Drawing Annotation Symbology
Steps
1. Select the Drawing Annotation Symbology command from the bar menu.
Annotation
7.Drawing
The system displays the Drawing Annotation Symbology form with a list of the
predefined drawing annotation categories.
2. Select Category
Select a category to use.
The system displays the message Active Placement Data Updated.
3. Define any overrides values you want to use.
4. Select Cancel to exit the form, or select and accept another drawing annotation
category to be updated.
343
________________
7.13 Name Label

This command activates the Name Label form, and is used to place annotation graphics, text,
and labels on the drawing.
The list of name labels available for placement can be restricted on the basis of
drawing type. This is done in Project Setup; refer to this section found later
in the document for more information.
The Project Data Manager module controls whether or not the Leader Line
ON/OFF and Line Terminator ON/OFF options are available for use. For
more information, refer to Project Data Manager.
The graphics for the name label are placed on the MicroStation level associated with the PDS
Drawing category of name labels. The graphic parameters and label text contents for the label
type are defined in the Label Description Library. Refer to the PDS Piping Reference
Database Users Guide for more information on category assignments and label descriptions.
The system places name labels in a drawing with capitalized text regardless of how the data is
stored.
Labels can include an angle such as the bend angle of a piping component to be displayed in
degrees and minutes, including any decimal attributes, on the basis of the angular format. This
format is specified on the Angular/Slope Label/Readout form in the Project Data
Manager.
344
________________ Name Label
Mechanics
Annotation
7.Drawing
Placing Name Labels in Circular Enclosures
When placing name labels with circles, make sure the text height is small enough to fit inside
of the circle. The circle does not open if the text height is too large.
The following rules apply to any labels specified to be enclosed within a circle or a circle with
a bisector:
You specify the circle diameter in absolute terms, for example 1/2", in the Label
Description Library Manager when the label is created or revised. If the circle diameter
is undefined, the circle is created in the same manner as the current practice.
If the labels text does not include a dash and the text fits within the circle defined for
that label, the labels text is center-justified in circle.
If the labels text does not include a dash but the text does not fit within the circle
defined for that label, the labels text is placed left-justified with respect to the circle
and the right side of the circle is opened for the text.
If the labels text includes a dash, the text is broken into two lines. The text that
precedes the dash will be placed above the bisector, and the text that follows the dash
will be placed below the bisector. The dash itself is not included within the label.
A user-defined extension to the text length can be used to determine whether or not the
labels text fits within the circular enclosure. This extension is specified using the
Miscellaneous Label Data form in Project Data Manager (Project Administrator).
The extension is specified as a scale factor of the average text width of the label.
("Average text width" is defined as the actual text length divided by the number of
characters comprising the text.) If no extension is specified in Project Data Manager,
the default extension of .25 times the average text width.
Placing Name Labels in Rectangular

Enclosures
The following rules apply to any labels specified to be enclosed within a rectangle:
The length of the rectangle is determined by the actual length of the labels text for that
specific label - not the maximum length of the labels text, as defined in the Label
Description Library. This length is padded by .25 times the text width unless a user-
defined extension is used.
The labels text is left-justified for multi-line labels.
A user-defined extension to the text length can be used to determine whether or not the
labels text fits within the circular enclosure. This extension is specified using the
Miscellaneous Label Data form in Project Data Manager (Project Administrator).
345
________________
The extension is specified as a scale factor of the average text width of the label.
("Average text width" is defined as the actual text length divided by the number of
characters comprising the text.) If no extension is specified in Project Data Manager,
the default extension of .25 times the average text width.
Placing Name Labels to Identify Equipment

Groups
When you want to place a name label on an equipment group that is a parametric shape
(defined through Equipment Eden), snap to an element within the parametric shape. The
associative linkage, which uniquely identifies the parametric shape within the equipment
group, and the key point that identifies that element will be used to associate (and update) the
label with the equipment group.
If the Equipment Eden definition for a parametric shape is modified after a

label has been associated with it, the associativity between the element and the
label may be lost. In this case, you will need to delete the label and place a
new one.
If the parametric shape is deleted and replaced, a new associative linkage will
be assigned, and subsequent use of Update Labels will automatically delete
the label.
This feature has no effect on labels associated with nozzles, since nozzles have well-defined
connect points.
If the equipment group was placed using primitive shapes, the gruop will have no associative
linkage, and you must associate the label with the equipment groups attribute linkage by
placing a data point on the appropriate element. Therefore, it is recommended that you create
equipment groups using Equipment Eden as much as possible.
346
________________ Name Label
Commands
System label selection: Select Component Tag, Piping Line Number, Piping
Annotation
7.Drawing
Piecemark, or Piping Reducer to label a specific item within a drawing view.
Drawing View Scale Select to place a displayable attribute label for the drawing
view scale.
Drawing View Name Select to place a displayable attribute label for the drawing
view name.
You can specify the drawing view for which the drawing view scale or name label
applies by snapping to the outline graphics for the drawing view or by identifying a
design element in the drawing view. Unless specifically notified (by a message), these
labels can all be updated with the Update Labels command.
User label selection
Select the Drawing View option or one of the four discipline (Piping/Equipment,
Structural, PLANTGEN, Electrical Raceway) options, and specify the type of label
from a display list associated with the selected option to place user-defined labels.
Select Miscellaneous to place labels from the Miscellaneous list defined in the Label
Description Library of Reference Data Manager (PD_Data). Refer to the description
of the Label Description Library in the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for
more information on creating labels with user-specified text.
Select User Input to place a label with text to be specified as the label is created.
Select the label from the display list and key in the text string, which remains active
until you select a different label type or select the Restart button. To key in a two line
label, key in a backslash "\" in the text string where you want the second line to start.
This user-specified text is respected by the Update Labels command. Refer to the
description of the Label Description Library in the Reference Data Manager Reference
Guide for more information on creating labels with user-specified text.
Text Drag Off/On Defines if the name label text is placed using drag mode or not.
After the leader line is placed, the text and any label enclosure is placed in drag mode.
Moving the text does not affect the leader line. To accept the placement of the dragged
text, select Accept from the pocket menu.
347
________________
Place No Leader/Place Leader Line Defines if the label is placed with a leader line
or not. When no leader line is placed, and the drag mode is enabled, the text for the
label will be formed and displayed in drag mode. You may then use the data button, or
snap to existing graphics in the drawing to specify the desired location of the label.
You can cancel the label placement with the reset button.
Line Term Off/On Defines if the leader line terminator displays or not.
Once the label is placed in the drawing, both the Place No Leader/Place
Leader Line and the Line Term Off/On options remains in effect until you
do one of the following:
Change the option for either the leader line or the line terminator.
Select a different label type.
Select an option that results in a different list of label types being

displayed.
Select the Restart button.
Exit the command.
Select one of the following options within the Place Name Label
command:
Define Active Leader Line
Move Label
Move Text Only
348
________________ Name Label
Modify Label
Delete Element
Annotation
7.Drawing
Place Flow Arrow
Add Coordinate Label
Axis Lock Off/On When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock for
placement of name labels in a drawing. You can toggle this axis lock while placing the
vertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can be locked to either the
horizontal or vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segment may not be locked
to a drawing axis.
Name Label Only/With Coordinate Label Toggle to place a name label only, or to
place a name label and a coordinate label as one operation. Following the placement of
the name label the system activates the Coordinate Label form. Refer to Coordinate
Label, page 356. Both the name label and the coordinate label created with this
command can be updated using the Update Labels command.
The text representing the coordinate label is created on the MicroStation level
associated with the drawing category for coordinate labels. The text
representing the name label and the remaining graphics are created on the
MicroStation level associated with the drawing category for name labels.
the With Coordinate Label option to specify whether the coordinate label is placed
above or below the name label.
Coordinate Label Activates the Coordinate Label form. This form allows you to
place coordinate labels. Refer to Coordinate Label, page 356 for more information.
349
________________
L = left
R = right
T = top
B = bottom
C = center
label.

Active Angle: Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle.
Set the With Active Angle/Along Leader Line toggle to With Active Angle.
350
________________ Name Label
Annotation
7.Drawing
After setting the toggle to the desired position, place a data point or snap to identify the
label to be moved. You can move a specified label or a label and any associated
graphics to a new location using drag mode. The system highlights the identified label
(and optionally all associated graphics, such as the leader line).
placed.
Move Text Only Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire text,
or move just a single text element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move
After setting the toggle to the desired position, select and place a data point or snap to
identify the text label to be moved. This option works the same as the Move Entire
Label option except that only the label is moved, and the leader line graphics remain in
place. The system puts the text only in raster drag.
placed.
placed.
351
________________
is placed.
leader line.

placed.

Place Flow Arrow Select and place a data point to identify the pipe to be labeled
with a flow direction arrow. Then press <D> to accept the highlighted pipe. You can
place a flow arrow (including bi-directional flow arrows, where applicable) in any
drawing view if flow for the drawing was defined in the design file. If flow has not
been defined for the specified pipe, a message is displayed informing you that the flow
352
________________ Name Label
direction is undefined. Place a data point to specify the origin for the flow arrow
symbol.
Add Coordinate Label Select and place a data point or snap to identify the
Annotation
7.Drawing
previously created name label to be used for adding a coordinate label. (Do not identify
the component being labeled.) Then, Accept to place the specified name label. The
system automatically creates the coordinate label relative to the witness line of the
identified name label and associates the two labels. Both the name label and the
coordinate label can be updated by using the Update Labels command. The text for
the coordinate label and the text for the name label are associated for move, modify, and
delete operations.
This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed.
The flow arrow symbol must be defined in active cell library for the drawing
as in the delivered cell library.
The system projects this point to the centerline of the pipe and places the flow arrow.
Flow arrows can also be placed during automatic label placement.
If drag mode is enabled, the flow arrow will be oriented in drag mode on the basis of
the direction of flow in the model and the drawing views orientation.
Edit Text Select this option to partially edit that part of the user-defined text in the
label. Refer to Edit Text, page 325 for more information.
Add Name Label Select and place a data point or snap to identify the previously
created coordinate label to be used for adding a name label. (Do not identify the
component being labeled.) Then, Accept to place the specified name label. The system
automatically creates the name label relative to the witness line of the identified
coordinate label and associates the two labels. Both the name label and the coordinate
label can be updated by using the Update Labels command. The text for the
coordinate label and the text for the name label are associated for move, modify, and
delete operations.
This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed.
353
________________
Steps
At any point in the operation of this command, you can set the character size or define the
label orientation.
1. Select the Name Label command.
The system activates the Name Label form.
2. Select the desired label option to be used to place name labels from the Name Label
form.
3. Identify Component
Place a data point to identify the item to be labeled such as a pipe, component, piping
line, or drawing view border for view scale or name labels.
4. Accept/Reject
Press <D> to accept the highlighted item, or press <R> to reject the item and make
another selection.
5. Toggle the appropriate lock option to on or off as desired.
6. To place element labels and miscellaneous annotation labels, continue with Step 7 to
identify the vertices of the leader line.
OR
Go to Step 9 to place drawing view and drawing scale labels.
7. Enter Data Pt 2
Place a series of data points to identify the vertices of the reference line running from
the identified component to the label location. The leader line rubber-bands, following
you to the next data point.
You can press <R> to back up and replace the previous vertex. (For example, the first
data point defaults to the location point identified in Step 4, so the first prompt asks for
data point 2. If you press <R> the system prompts for data point 1 enabling you to
specify the starting vertex of the leader line.)
8. Accept Leader Line or Reset
Select Accept at any point to complete the reference line and set the label location.
(For example, if Accept is used when only one vertex of the leader line has been
defined, the active label orientation is used to place the label with no leader line. When
no leader line is present, you can place the label in drag mode.)
354
________________ Name Label
Some labels are defined in the label description library to have no leader
lines. For these labels the system only prompts for the location of the
text.
Annotation
7.Drawing
An example of element labels placed using a leader line to set the label location is
shown below.
9. Enter Label Location
Place a data point in the view to identify the location of the drawing view name,
drawing scale label, or other label.
10. Select the desired option from the bottom of the form to manipulate, modify, add or
delete name labels placed in the drawing view(s).
355
________________
7.14 Coordinate Label

This command activates the Coordinate Label form. It is used to label the coordinates at a
specified location, to select the coordinate values to be labeled, and to specify the form of the
coordinate label. These options may require frequent changes depending on the density and
configuration of data within the area being labeled.
Most coordinate labels can be updated to reflect changes in the model, or to be realigned with
a drawing view which was modified. Refer to Update Labels, page 319 for more information.
However, coordinate labels placed in non-PDS models are non-associative. A warning is
displayed indicating that the coordinate label will not be moved, updated, or deleted
automatically by the Update Labels command on the basis of any changes to the
corresponding non-PDS model.
Since the coordinate value(s) to be labeled reflect the active PDS Coordinate System, the
graphics for the coordinate label are placed on the MicroStation level associated with the PDS
Drawing category for coordinate labels. Refer to the Project Data Manager section in the PD
Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on category assignments and
label descriptions.
Until you revise the default values in Project Data Manager, the Coordinate Label command
uses the following symbology options:
The default line style of coordinate label witness lines is solid (0).
The alternate (centerline) line style for coordinate label witness lines is dashed (4).
Any coordinate label with no prefix or suffix defined will be displayed with the text
height and width for coordinate labels without supplementary text.
Any coordinate label with a prefix or suffix defined will be displayed using the text
width, height, and weight determined by the prefix/suffix supplementary text option.
There will be two spaces between the prefix or suffix and the coordinate value. Any
leading or trailing blanks defined in the prefix or suffix will be automatically removed
prior to forming the coordinate label.
The line spacing for labels with multiple lines is determined from the RDB data for the
drawing. For previously-created drawings, the default is the present function of text height.
Placement of a coordinate label without a leader line is based on the active MicroStation
text/text node justification.
356
________________ Coordinate Label
Annotation
7.Drawing
Commands
Label Only Places the label only (no leader lines). When using this command and
the drag mode, the text for the label will be formed and displayed in drag mode. You
may then use the data button, or snap to existing graphics in the drawing to specify the
desired location of the label. You can cancel the label placement with the reset button.
(Coordinate label justification settings will be ignored when drag mode is enabled.)
line.
357
________________
Coordinate Sequence Displays the current sequence in which coordinate values

will be defined. The default sequence is Easting, Northing, Elevation. To change this
sequence, place a data point in this field; this activates a list of possible sequences for
you to choose from.
Select the desired sequence by placing a data point on it. Any coordinate labels created
prior to this enhancement will be considered by the Update Labels command to have
been defined as Easting, Northing, Elevation.
Supplementary Text Options You can specify that the coordinate label be created
with supplementary text. This text supplements the basic coordinate label, which
consists of the coordinate value, the coordinate axis short description, and the
coordinate system short description. The supplementary text can be placed as a prefix
or suffix.
Supplementary text may be edited or added in the drawings seed data (Type 63)
through the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator. Refer to the Project
Administrator Reference Guide for more information regarding supplementary text.
Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, or Elevation) to activate a display list of

The prefix and suffix text options are defined in the RDB. Refer to the Project Data
Manager section in the PD Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on
defining these values. Some of these options are only valid when labeling a specific
coordinate value, such as Bottom of Pipe and Elevation.
Bottom of Pipe If you select Bottom Of Pipe as the prefix or suffix for an elevation
coordinate, the system indicates that this option is active and forces all coordinate labels
to have the elevation of the Bottom of Pipe. This option can only be activated when
selected in conjunction with the Prefix or Suffix for elevation.
Face of Flange If you select Face of Flange, the connect point location at the bolted
end of a piping item which is used for the coordinate readout is adjusted by one-half
gasket separation. For equipment nozzles, the datum point location is at the face-of-
flange so it is not necessary to compensate for gasket separation. This command
verifies that you have selected a bolted end of a piping component, a pipe, an
instrument component, or a nozzle.
358
Top of Steel If you select Top of Steel, the coordinate value labeled is the highest
elevation of the structural member rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.
You may place a top-of-steel coordinate label using sparse model graphics. If you do
Annotation
7.Drawing
so, you must snap to a structural member for which the center line represents top-of-
steel.
Top of Concrete If you select Top of Concrete, the coordinate value labeled is the
highest elevation of the concrete rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.
Top of Platform If you select Top of Platform, the coordinate value labeled is the
elevation of the plane of the platform on which the grating or checkered plate is
supported.
If a structural model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following rules
will apply:
The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the structural component, rather
than the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be displayed if a
horizontal component is not identified in conjunction with this feature.
Update Labels will respect any changes made to the drawing view definition or the
platform which it describes.
If an equipment model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following rules
will apply:
The elevation option for the coordinates will be automatically enabled.
The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the equipments parametric
shape, rather than the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be
displayed if a horizontal component is not identified in conjunction with this feature.
Update Labels will respect any changes made to the drawing view definition or the
platform which it describes
Text Drag Off/On Defines if the coordinate label text is placed using drag mode or
not. After the leader line is placed, the text and any label enclosure is placed in drag
mode. Moving the text does not affect the leader line. To accept the placement of the
dragged text, select Accept from the pocket menu.
Line Term Off/On Set to determine whether or not the witness line for a coordinate
label has a line terminator.
359
________________
The line terminator specified in the RDB for coordinate labels is used if the
line terminator is on. If you choose a witness line without a line terminator, a
gap is left between the location being labeled and the end of the witness line.
The plot size of the gap is defined in the RDB.
Axis Lock On/Off When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock for
placement of coordinate labels with as many as four vertices. You can toggle this axis
lock while placing the vertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can be
locked to either the horizontal or vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segment
may not be locked to a drawing axis.
Activation of the axis lock limits you to a leader line with only two vertices, and
deactivation enables you to place a leader line with as may as four vertices.
Coordinate Only/With Name Label Toggle to create a coordinate label only, or

create a coordinate label and a name label as one operation. Following the placement of
the coordinate label, the system activates the Name Label form. See Name Label, page
344 for more information. Both the coordinate label and the name label created with
this command can be updated using the Update Labels commands.
The text representing the name label is created on the MicroStation level
associated with the drawing category for name labels. The text representing
the name coordinate and the remaining graphics are created on the
MicroStation level associated with the drawing category for coordinate labels.
the With Name Label option to specify whether the name label is placed above or
below the coordinate label.
Name Label Activates the Name Label form. This form allows you to place name
labels. Refer to Name Label, page 344 for more information.
360
Annotation
7.Drawing
L = left
R = right
T = top
B = bottom
C = center
label.

Active Angle: Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle. Set
361
________________
After setting the toggle to the desired setting, select and place a data point or snap to
identify the label to be moved. You can move a specified label or a label and any
associated graphics to a new location using drag mode. The system highlights the
identified label (and optionally all associated graphics, such as the leader line).
placed.
Move Text Only Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label,
or move just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move
Select and place a data point or snap to identify the label to be moved. This option
works the same as the Move Label option except that only the label is moved, and the
leader line graphics remain in place. The system puts the text only in raster drag.
placed.
placed.
362
Annotation
7.Drawing
is placed.
leader line.

placed.


Annotation command.
Add Coord Label Select and place a data point or snap to identify a previously
created name label to be used for adding a coordinate label. (Do not identify the
component being labeled.) Then, place a data point to specify the label location. The
system places the coordinate label relative to the witness line of the identified name
label and associates the two labels.
Both the name label and the coordinate label can be updated by using the
Update Labels command. The text for the coordinate label and the text for
the name label are associated for move, modify, and delete operations.
363
________________
Steps
At any point during the operation of this command you can set the character size or define the
label orientation. The line spacing for the labels is 0.25 times the active character size. You
can select RESET at any time to identify another item or select another label type.
1. Select the Coordinate Label command.
The system activates the Coordinate Label form.
2. Select the desired coordinate Label Graphics option to specify the placement location
on the leader line for the coordinates.
The active option is highlighted.
3. Select one of the Supplementary Text Options.
4. Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, or Elevation) to activate a display list of

5. Select from the display list to specify the supplementary text to be added to the
coordinate label.
OR
Select the text block, and key in the desired supplementary text.
These special text options are defined in the RDB. Refer to the Project Data
Manager section in the PDS Project Administrator Reference Guide for
information on defining these values. Some of these options are only valid
when labeling a specific coordinate value, such as Bottom of Pipe and
Elevation.
If you select Bottom Of Pipe as the prefix or suffix for an elevation coordinate,
the system indicates that this option is active and forces all coordinate labels to
have the elevation of the Bottom of Pipe. This option can only be activated
when selected in conjunction with the Prefix or Suffix for elevation.
If you select Face of Flange, the connect point location at the bolted end which
is used for the coordinate readout is adjusted by one-half gasket separation. For
bolted nozzles, the connect point location is at the face-of-flange so it is not
necessary to compensate for gasket separation. This command verifies that
you have selected a bolted end of a piping component, a pipe, an instrument
component, or a nozzle.
If you select Top of Steel, the coordinate value labeled is the highest elevation
of the structural member rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.
364
If you select Top of Concrete, the coordinate value labeled is the highest
elevation of the concrete rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.
Annotation
7.Drawing
1. Toggle the appropriate lock option to on or off as desired.
2. Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, Elevation) corresponding to the type of

coordinate label to be placed from the bottom of the form. You can select any
combination of coordinates.
The active coordinate label is displayed in the message area.
3. Identify Coordinate Location
Place a data point over an element or snap to a keypoint to identify the label location.
4. Accept/Reject
Press <D> to accept the highlighted element, or press <R> to reject and make another
selection.
5. Enter Data Pt 2
Place a series of data points to identify the vertices of the reference line running from
the coordinate location to the label location. You can press <R> to back up and replace
the previous vertex. The leader line rubber-bands, stretching with you until the next data
point is placed.
6. Accept Leader Line or Reset
Select Accept at any point to complete the reference line and set the label location.
For the Label Only graphics option, the system only prompts for the
location of the text.
The system places the label at the specified location.
365
________________
Examples of coordinate labels placed with and without supplementary text:
7. Select an option from the bottom of the form to manipulate, modify, add or delete
coordinate labels placed in the drawing view(s).
The system highlights the identified label (and optionally all associated graphics, such
as the leader line).
8. Place a second data point to place the label at the new location.
366
________________ Automatic Labels
7.15 Automatic Labels
Annotation
7.Drawing
This option selects label(s) to be placed automatically in one or more drawing views. It can
also be used to label the contents of a fence and to define component search criteria to
automatically label only certain elements.
The following rules apply to any labels specified to a include a circle or a circle with a
bisector line as the label enclosure.
You specify the circle diameter in absolute terms, for example 1/2", in the Label
Description Library Manager when the label is created or revised. If the circle diameter
is undefined, the circle is created in the same manner as the current practice.
If the labels text does not include a dash and the text fits within the circle defined for
that label, the labels text is placed center-justified with respect to the center of the
circle.
If the labels text does not include a dash but the text does not fit within the circle
defined for that label, the labels text is placed left-justified with respect to the circle
and the right side of the circle is opened for the text.
If the labels text includes a dash, the text is broken into two lines. The top line is the
text that precedes the dash and the lower line is the text that follows the dash. The dash
itself is not included within the label.
In determining whether or not the text fits within the circle, .25 times the text width is added
to the length.
The following rules apply to any labels specified to a include a rectangle as the label
enclosured.
The length of the rectangle is determined by the actual length of the labels text for that
specific label - not the maximum length of the labels text, as defined in the Label
Description Library. This length is padded by .25 times the text width.
The labels text is left-justified for multi-line labels.
Labels can include an angle such as the bend angle of a piping component to be displayed in
degrees and minutes, including any decimal attributes, on the basis of the angular format. This
format is specified on the Angular/Slope Label/Readout form in the Project Data
Manager.
367
________________
Commands
Active Leader Line Off/On Set to On to place the leader line defined with the
Define Active Leader Line option on either the Coordinate Labels form or the Name
Labels form. Set to Off to use the leader line defined in the label description library for
the selected label.
Search Crit Off/On Set on to use a specific search criteria defined with the Define
Search Criteria option which restricts the elements to be automatically labeled based
on database attributes.
Label Fence Contents Places a fence and labels the items inside the fence. The
Label Fence Contents command is discussed in the next section.
Define Component Search Criteria Initiates a search for specific components,

and labels those that are found. The Define Search Criteria command is discussed in
Search Criteria - Component Form, page 157 .
Orient Active Label Specifies the angle at which the label will be placed. You may
select Horizontal, Vertical, or key in the angle.
Select Drawing View and/or Label Type

Select the drawing view(s) to be labeled from the
Drawing Views list at the top of the form, then select
the label type(s) to be placed from the Label Types list.
Select Accept to process the request. The system places
the specified label(s) at a location near the low or high
range of the labeled item and displays the message
Automated Label Placement Complete.
368
________________ Automatic Labels
You can use the Move Label or Modify Label option in the Update Labels,
Name Labels or Coordinate Labels commands to move the labels after
placement.
Annotation
7.Drawing
369
________________
7.15.1 Label Fence Contents

This option is used to define a specific portion of a drawing by placing a fence to
automatically label the fence contents. The depth of the fence is controlled by the depth of the
drawing view. You can annotate groups of components that require similar label types and
leader line configurations.
Steps
1. Select the Label Fence Contents from the Automatic Labels form.
2. Identify First Fence Point
Place a data point to identify the starting location of the area to be fenced for labeling.
3. Identify Second Fence Point
Place another data point in the opposite corner to complete the fence.
4. Select Drawing View and/or Label Type
Place a data point to select the label type to be placed, and select Accept.
The system automatically places the selected label within the fenced area, and displays
the message Automated Label Placement Complete.
370
7.15.2 Search Criteria - Component Form
Annotation
7.Drawing
When you choose Component Search Criteria from the Discrimination Data Creation
form or from the Discrimination Data Revision form, the Search Criteria - Component
form is displayed.
This form specifies which component attributes are restricted for the report. The default is no
search criteria (that is, no restrictions all component attributes are reported). The most
commonly reported component attributes are available as form options, but you are not
restricted to those options. To display additional attributes, grouped by entity, click Other.
371
________________
Define all the common search criteria such as Commodity Code and
Fabrication Category before selecting the Other option. Once the Other
option is selected, the search criteria should be defined separately for each
category, such as Piping Component, Instrument Component,
Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support.
the form.
restriction.
When you select an entity grouping that includes the attribute you want to restrict, a list of
associated attributes is displayed.
372
Annotation
7.Drawing
When you select a code-listed attribute, the Review Standard Notes form is
displayed. This form provides a list of valid codes for the specified attribute.
Simply select a code from the list and click Accept to continue with the
specification.
specifications.
The search criteria defined through the Piping Component, Instrument

Component, Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support buttons will not be displayed
as a single list. To see the search criteria defined through these buttons, select
the appropriate button.
Fields and Options

Component Displays the restricted component attributes once they have been
defined.
Commodity Name Restricts the reported components by means of the commodity

name attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the
specification.
Commodity Code Restricts the reported components by means of the commodity

code attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.
Fabrication Category Restricts the reported components by means of the

frabrication category attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the
specification.
Component Group Number Restricts the reported components by means of the

component group number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to
Tag/Component Number Restricts the reported components by means of the

tag/component number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to
373
________________
Other Displays the entity options.
Piping Component Restricts the reported components by means of any of the

attributes that are associated with piping components. From the displayed list, select an
Instrument Component Restricts the reported components by means of any of the

attributes that are associated with instruments components. From the displayed list,
select an attribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select
a code list value to complete the specification.
Piping/Tubing Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes

that are associated with piping or tubing components. From the displayed list, select an
Pipe Support Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributes
that are associated with pipe support attributes. From the displayed list, select an
Clear ALL Component Search Criteria Deletes the restricted component

attributes once they have been defined.
the specification.
click Accept.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Component Search Criteria.
The Search Criteria - Component form is displayed.
2. Select Attribute
3. Select Operator
374
Annotation
7.Drawing
Accept.
375
________________
376
________________ Update Annotation Labels
8. Update Annotation Labels

This command is very similar to the Update Labels command that is available in the graphics
environment of Drawing Manager (PD_Draw). Update Annotation Labels uses the same
rules to update labels that are used in the Update Labels command. Refer to Update Labels,
page 319 for more details.
Selecting this command activates the Update Annotation Labels form, which prompts you to
select the drawing type for which you wish to update annotation labels.
Labels
Annotation
8. Update
Selecting and accepting a drawing type from this list activates the list of available drawings of
the selected drawing type.
377
________________
Selecting and accepting a drawing from the list activates the Update Annotation
Labels job submission form. The Update Annotation Labels activity may be
submitted immeditately, or you may delay submission until a specified day and time.
To submit the job immediately, leave the toggle in its default position: Submit
Immediately. To specify a delayed submisison, switch the toggle to its Submission
is Delayed setting, and specify the desired day and time.
When the batch job is processed, it will create three log files in the temp directory:
udl_log.<drawing type number> contains the environment variables set for the
batch process
dlupdate.<drawing type number> contains the report of which drawings were

updated and which were not
dlquelog.<drawing type number> contains messages for any errors that may
have been encountered while processing the drawings being updated
The file extension for each of these log files is the code-listed drawing type value for
the drawing view being processed. For example, the log file extension for files
associated with the drawing type delivered as Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections
and Details would be 665, as that drawing type is number 665 in Standard Note
2000 (Drawing Type).
378
________________ Vector Hidden Line Manager
9. Vector Hidden Line Manager

This command activates the Vector Hidden Line Manager form. It is used to create
hidden-line-removed graphics for a specified drawing. The graphics can be created with
visible lines only, or you can create the graphics with both visible and hidden lines. There is
also an option for including or removing reference models. Optional queues, besides the
default queue, can be created and defined. Refer to the Queue Setup section for more
information.
First, the system displays the List of Drawing Types and prompts you to select a drawing
type. Once a drawing type is selected and confirmed, the system prompts you to select a
drawing from the List of Drawings.
Hidden-Line
9.Vector
When the drawing is selected and confirmed, the system activates the main Vector Hidden
Line Manager form.
In order to ensure predictable results, Vector Hidden Line Manager should be run
only when referenced models are not being revised, unless the pre-processor option to
copy referenced models to a temporary working directory is used. More information
about this pre-processing option is available in the next section.
379
________________
Before Using This Command

Pre-processing and Post-processing Options
VHL provides some pre-processing and post-processing options which can allow you to
customize your workflow. To use these options, you must modify your pds.cmd file so that it
exports a variable called VHL_PPOPS.
Pre-processing Option
The pre-processing option, if used, forces VHL to copy reference model files into a temporary
working directory before processing begins. This will prevent unpredictable results that could
be obtained by running VHL on model files that were being modified during processing.
To set up this option, you must export the VHL_PPOPS variable with a keyword that
specifies the working directory that will be used to store the reference model files being
processed. You can specify the desired working directory explicitly, or you can assign the
systems temp directory to be the working directory.
Refer to the examples below on how to specify the working directory:
$ENV{VHL_PPOPS}=temp:drive:\explicit\directory\path;
In this case, temp lets the system know that the specified path is to be used as the
working directory.
$ENV{VHL_PPOPS}=temp:drive:\explicit\directory\path savetemp;
The addition of the savetemp variable will cause the system to retain files in the
specified directory instead of automatically deleting them upon completion of the
process. This command can be useful for troubleshooting purposes.
EXAMPLE: $ENV{VHL_PPOPS}=temp:c:\vhlfiles savetemp;
Save and maintain copies of all reference files used when VHL is run on a drawing
in the c:\vhlfiles directory.
In either case, the system creates a subdirectory under the specified temporary directory to
store the copied files. This directory will be named vhltmpaa, where aa is varied to creat a
unique subdirectory. For instance, if the vhltmpaa, vhltmpab, and vhltmpac directories exist,
the next subdirectory to be created would be named vhltmpad.
Post-processing Options
Post-processor options are activated by exporting the VHL_PPOPS variable with any of the
following keywords:
arc
380
Forces the system to recreate arcs out of VHL-stroked circular elements.
backp
Removes the backplane (the invisible back face of a drawn object) and edges parallel to
the viewing direction. If this option is not used, VHL retains edges from these faces
even though they are overlaid by identical edges originating from a matching front face.
For example, if you run VHL with backp enabled, on a view where you are viewing a
pipe "end on" so it looks like a circle) the graphics for the inside edge (the other end of
the pipe) will not show when moving or deleting the circle that represents the pipe in
the VHL graphics.
cell
Regroups all elements that came from one original outermost element (type 2, 18, 19,
23, and so forth) so that they fall under one cell header. If the original element was a
simple unnested element that was processed into several pieces, they will also be
grouped under a cell header.
This is useful if you intend to edit VHL graphics after the process has been completed.
All PDS-placed EDEN components are drawn "on the fly" based on line information.
The last step EDEN takes prior to placing the component in the model file is to make
the graphical item a cell. When VHL is run, it breaks the cells down into simple
Hidden-Line
9.Vector
geometries for processing. If the cell option is not used, the final output is the same
elements that VHL processed. If the option is used, items that were cells are again
made into cells. For instance, if a gate valve is processed by VHL without the cell
option, the valve will be made up of various line elements. If you try to move, copy, or
in any way modify the "valve," you will only get it one piece at a time, such as the
valve operator stem. If the cell option were used, the valve could be manipulated as one
item.
Cells are named according to the following sequence:
V0001H
V0002H
V0003H
:
V0009H
V000AH
V000BH
V000CH
:
VZZZZH
To avoid naming conflicts, previously existing VHL cells (recognized by the V and H
terminators) are named according to the same convention.
join
Attempts successive processing iterations (passes) to join fragmented line strings and
arcs. The number of passes is dependent on the VHL resolution. (A resolution of 1000
in PD_Draw results in one processing pass.)
381
________________
min:X
Eliminates any line string with a total viewplane-projected length (in UORs) less than
the value of X, where X is any non-negative integer.
keep
Keeps the original VHL output file for troubleshooting purposes, and does not
overwrite it with the post-processor output (.pOp) file. By default, the .pOp file is
renamed to the final output file. The .pOp file resides in the same directory as the VHL
post-processor output file.
links
Retains linkages passed from VHL to the post-processor so you can identify the origin
of each output element. This is useful in troubleshooting. The linkage format is listed
below:
word1 - U bit set, class=0, wtf=7

word2 - 4265 (hex 10A9) before; 4266 after postprocessing
word3 - areano (starting from 1)
word4 - attachmentno (from type 5)
word5 - bandno (starting from 1)
word6 - surface type and surfaceno (low 12 bits)
word7 - 4-byte elementno of header element as shown by EDG
word8 - used only if word7 is large enough to need two words
Total size: 8 words. Fields useful for tracking output elements are areano,
attachmentno, and elementno.
oldgg
Carry source graphic group numbers onto output elements. This can be used with or
without the cell header option. Be aware that graphic group numbers from different
reference files may not be unique.
pdslevels
Ignore PD_Draw specified output levels, and carry output levels onto output elements.
This feature is not supported by PD_Draw. Using this feature invalidates the
current method for controlling VHL graphics, and will result in accumulation of
graphics output from different runs.
For example, using this option, a drawing with piping and equipment reference
models using the delivered categories will have revision clouds and triangles,
equipment physical, and physical not approved pipe supports all on level 10 in
the drawing.
382
This option should be used only when the drawing will NOT be edited again
inside PDS after VHL processing (as when the VHL document will be a
deliverable). Running VHL with this post-processor option should be the last
step for creating a deliverable non_PDS drawing.
verbose
Displays post-processor statistics.
Hidden-Line
9.Vector
383
________________
VHL_PPOPS Command Environment Strings

These are examples of VHL_PPOPS command environment strings from the pds.cmd file
with explanations:
$ENV{VHL_PPOPS}=arc backp cell join min:5 temp:c:\vhlfile;
Invokes arc restroking, backplane elimination, cell re-creation, joining of partial

elements, deletes anything less than 5 UORs in length and creates temporary working
copies of reference files in c:file.
This is a typical user configuration.
ENV{VHL_PPOPS}=arc backp cell join min:5 temp:c:\vhlfile savetemp keep links

verbose;
Invokes settings as above, with the addition of troubleshooting options. The savetemp
option is added to keep the copied reference files after processing. The keep option
maintains the .pOp file. Links allows tracing of element origins, and verbose provides
statistical information which may be useful.
This is a typical troubleshooting configuration.
384
Commands
Queues Displays a scrolling list of the queues available for performing the hidden
line removal process.
Hidden-Line
9.Vector
Refer to the Queue Setup section for information on creating and
defining queues.
Submission is Delayed / Submit Immediately Toggle to complete processing

vector hidden line immediately or delay job submission to batch.
Accept the displayed time, or key in the desired time to submit to batch if submission is
delayed.
Day Hr: Min Displays the day and time for delayed submission. These fields are
only active when the submission toggle is set to Submission is Delayed.
Reference Model Display by System/Reference Model Display by User Defines

the categories and reference models to process by the defaults set in Project Setup, or
allows you to define which categories and reference models are to be processed.
Selecting by User activates a form that allows you to select specific reference models
available to that drawing, or to turn On or Off all possible reference models for that
drawing.
Category control will not be restored to its initial state if changed. You must
reset categories manually after each run, if necessary.
All Drawing Views/Drawing Views by User Processes all drawing views or lets
you specify the individual drawing views you want processed.
Plot after VHL/No Plotting Toggle to Plot after VHL to plot the drawing after
completion of VHL processing. Selecting the plotting option activates the Plot
Manager form that allows you to specify plotting parameters for the active drawing.
385
________________
Visible Only / Visible and Hidden Toggle to display visible lines only or both
visible and hidden vector lines.
Cleanup Off/On Toggle On to cleanup lines hidden by the object itself or Off to
not perform cleanup. Lines of one object hidden by another object will still be shown.
Resolution Select and key in the desired resolution value. The higher the resolution
value the longer processing takes, but the output is of better quality. The recommended
starting value is 5,000, and the recommended range is 3000 to 10000.
Default VHL Drawings/Symbology based VHL Drawings Toggle Default VHL

Drawings to output VHL drawings with the default VHL symbology, or Symbology
based VHL Drawings to output VHL drawings based on different search criteria.
Refer to Symbology Based VHL Drawings, page 391 for more information.
Select Drawing Type Select the drawing type for hidden line processing, and
select Accept.
Select Drawing Select the drawing or drawings to be used for vector-

hidden-line-removal processing, and then Accept the
drawing.
Accept to Submit for Processing

Accept the selected drawings for processing.
Accept to Submit, or Modify Submit Data

Select the appropriate toggle to set the desired
parameters, then Accept the displayed parameter
settings.
The system performs the vector hidden line process and places it in your drawing. A message
indicating the time the job was submitted for processing is displayed if delay submission is
selected. The list of drawings is then redisplayed for another selection if desired.
386
The Vector Hidden Line Manager will automatically compress each drawing
once the previous vector hidden-line removed graphics have been deleted and
prior to initiating the vector hidden-line process for the drawing, reducing the
disk space required for large batch requests. It will also reduce the size of the
plot files that are generated after a vector hidden-line process by the Plot
Manager outside of the graphics environment.
To view your hidden line drawing after the vector hidden line process is complete, you must
turn off the drawing view display. Refer to the following Viewing Hidden Line Graphics
section for more information.
Hidden-Line
9.Vector
387
________________
9.1 Viewing Hidden Line Graphics

This option activates the Compose Drawing form. It, along with a series of forms, is used to
turn off the drawing view displays before the hidden-line graphics can be viewed in the
drawing environment. The Compose Drawing and the Add Category commands are used to
perform these steps.
Steps
1. Select Drawing Composition/Annotation from the Drawing Manager form, and
activate the drawing on which the vector hidden line process was run.
Notice that the wire frame drawing views are still displayed.
2. Select Drawing > Composition to activate the Composition palette.
3. Select the Compose Drawing command.
The system displays the Compose Drawing form with a list of drawing views for the
selected drawing.
4. Select the appropriate drawing view number from the list.
388
________________ Viewing Hidden Line Graphics
The system activates the Display/Snap/Locate toggles.
5. Toggle from Display On to Display Off to turn the display off for all reference models
of the selected drawing view, and select Accept.
The system updates the selected drawing view and turns off the display.
6. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each drawing view associated with the selected drawing.
7. Select View > Viewing to activate the Viewing palette.
Hidden-Line
9.Vector
8. Select the Category command.
The system activates the Drawing Categories form.
9. Select the Add command.
389
________________
The system displays the Add Drawing Categories form.
10. Select the Hidden Line Graphics option to turn on only the hidden line categories, and
select Accept.
11. Select View
Place a data point to identify the screen view(s) to display the vector hidden line
graphics.
The system displays the hidden line graphic categories in the selected view(s). An
example of hidden line removed drawing graphics is shown in the following figure.
390
________________ Symbology Based VHL Drawings
9.2 Symbology Based VHL Drawings

This option allows you to output VHL drawings based on search criteria set with the Search
Criteria for VHL command.
Before You Begin

Create the required search criteria. Refer to Search Criteria for VHL, page 401 for
information on creating VHL search criteria for Piping and Equipment.
Edit the file DrwSymMap.mdb in Microsoft Access.
Enter data in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap and

DrwTypeSymbMapAssoc tables in Microsoft Access.
Edit the PDS.CMD file to include the following line:
$ENV{VHL_PPOPS} = hidpdslev pdslevels;
This option can affect the way that regular VHL drawings are processed. To
Hidden-Line
9.Vector
avoid inaccuracies, be sure to remove this line from the PDS.CMD file, or
use a separate copy of the PDS.CMD file when processing Symbology based
VHL drawings.
Operating Sequence
1. In PD_Shell, select Drawing Manager > Vector Hidden Line Manager.
2. Select the VHL drawings to create.
3. On the Vector Hidden Line Manager form, set the Default VHL Drawings /
Symbology based VHL Drawings toggle to Symbology based VHL Drawings.
391
________________
4. Set the Visible Only / Visible and Hidden toggle to Visible and Hidden if you want
to display the hidden lines as well as the visible lines.
5. Click Accept.
The system creates the new VHL drawings in the vhl subdirectory under the drawings
directory. For example, if the drawings directory is \dwg\665 for piping
perspectives, the new VHL drawing is created in the \dwg\665\vhl subdirectory.
This new drawing does not behave like a default VHL drawing. Hence,
this step should be the final one in creating the drawings.
Drawings in the \vhl subdirectory are intended to be standalone

MicroStation drawings, and are not updated by subsequent
modifications to PDS models.
392
________________ Drawing Type and Symbology Map
9.2.1 Drawing Type and Symbology Map

This section provides details for using the DrwSymMap.mdb file. This Microsoft Access
file contains two database tables, SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap and
DrwTypeSymbMapAssoc, which control the symbology based VHL drawing creation.
Mapping the drawing types controls where the VHL drawings are generated, as well as the
search criteria used to generate the drawings.
Hidden-Line
9.Vector
393
________________
9.2.1.1 Drawing Type Map Association

This section provides details for using the DrwTypeSymbMapAssoc table.
Attributes
The following table shows the attributes used in the Drawing Type and Symbology Map,
along with their data types and maximum length.
Attribute Name Data Type Length Remarks

Drawingtype smallint 2 Codelisted value
MapNumber character 30
The Drawing Type attribute is the codelisted value for the desired drawing type. The Map
Number attribute is a user-defined name that is used in the
SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table.
Sample Map
Drawingtype MapNumber
===========================================================
663 PipeOneLine
665 PipePerspective
394
________________ Search Criteria Symbology Map
9.2.1.2 Search Criteria Symbology Map

This section provides details for using the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table. This
Microsoft Access file controls the symbology associated with the search criteria used to create
symbology based VHL drawings.
The search criteria for the Piping and Equipment disciplines are generated using the Search
Criteria for VHL command. Refer to Search Criteria for VHL, page 401 for information on
generating these search criteria.
The search criteria for EE Raceway and FrameWorks Plus must be entered directly into the
SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table. Refer to EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria,
page 396 and FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria, page 399 for information on generating
these search criteria.
Attributes
Attribute Name Data Type Length Remarks
MapNumber character 30 Map Number
from the Drawing
Hidden-Line
9.Vector
Type table
SequenceNumber integer 4
DisciplineIndexNum smallint 2 discipline_index_no
from pdtable_112
SearchCriteriaNumber character 24 search_number
from pdtable_145
Color integer 4 Codelisted from
MicroStation
color table
Level integer 4 MicroStation
Level
Sample Map
MapNumber SeqNum DiscIndxNum SrchCritNum Color Level
===============================================================
PipeOneLine 1 1 vhlpip1 2 2
PipeOneLine 2 1 vhlpip2 4 4
PipePerspective 1 1 vhlpip2 3 5
PipePerspective 2 1 vhlpipl 6 10
395
________________
9.2.1.2.1 EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria

The search criteria for any EE Raceway drawings to be output as symbology based VHL
drawings must be entered in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table directly.
You can define Raceway serach criteria such that all elements belonging to a particular one-
line type or system are grouped together, or all elements derived from a specific table in the
Raceway reference database are grouped together.
One-line Type Search Criteria

The syntax for one-line type search criteria is:
[any text]_OLT_[One-line type number]
where,
[any text] is any text string.
[One-line type number] is a number referring to the desired one-line type from
the ol_type table in the re_xxx schema.
Examples of one-line type search criteria include:
Tray_OLT_1 (searching for trays),

Cond_OLT_3 (searching for conduits), or
All_Duct_Banks_OLT_5 (searching for duct banks).
The search criteria text cannot exceed 47 characters, including the OLT
keyword.
For search criteria based on the one-line type, the software searches for all the children of that
one-line type, as well as the one-line types childrens children, and places these elements on
the indicated level using the specified color. For example, if the search criteria defined refers
to the one-line type "Tray," the symbologies for all the Raceway connect points (RCPs) and
one-lines belonging to this one-line type are changed in the VHL drawing. Also, the
symbologies of all the Straights, Fittings and other children of the RCPs and one-lines are
changed.
Entity Number Based Search Criteria

The syntax for search criteria based on the entity number is:
[any text]_ENT_[Entity number]
where,
396
________________ EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria
[Entity number] is the value of the entitynum property in the mscatalog

table of the the re_xxx schema.
Examples of entity number based search criteria include:
OneLines_ENT_204 (searching for all one-lines,

centerlines only), or
LightFixtures_ENT_250 (searching for all light
fixtures).
The search criteria text cannot exceed 47 characters, including the OLT
keyword.
The ENT search criteria cannot be applied to all the tables listed in the
mscatalog table.
System Type Number Based Search Criteria

Each one-line in EE Raceway (such as trays, conduits, etc.) can belong to a system or set of
Hidden-Line
9.Vector
systems. Thus, the tray or conduit represented by the one-line carries cables belonging to the
system to which the tray or conduit belongs. If a tray or conduit belongs to more than one
system, one of systems in the set is called the active system, and the rest of the systems are
called sub-systems. For more information on systems, refer to the EE Raceway Modeling
Reference Guide. For each element, the system checks whether a search criterion has been
defined for the active system to which the element belongs. If so, the system changes the
color and level of the element to match that assigned to the system.
The syntax for search criteria based on system type number is:
[any text]_SYS_[System type number]
where,
[System type number] is the value of the system_num property in the

ee_system table of the the re_xxx schema.
Examples of system type number based search criteria include:
Control_SYS_1 (searching for control systems), or

HighVoltage_SYS_3 (searching for high voltage systems).
The search criteria text cannot exceed 47 characters, including the SYS
keyword.
397
________________
Sample Raceway Search Criteria Map

==================================================================
RwayPerspective 1 5 Tray_OLT_1 3 5
RwayPerspective 2 5 Cond_OLT_3 6 10
RwayPerspective 3 5 LitFix_ENT_250 7 12
398
________________ FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria
9.2.1.2.2 FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria

The search criteria for any FrameWorks Plus drawings to be output as symbology based VHL
drawings must be entered in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table directly.
You can define FrameWorks+ search criteria such that all the elements that belong to the
same category can be grouped together. The valid categories and their corresponding
keywords are:
Category Keyword
Beam BEAM
Column COLUMN
Brace BRACE
Area member AREA
Arc member ARC
Volume member VOLUME
Sample FrameWorks Plus Search Criteria

Map
Hidden-Line
9.Vector
=================================================================
StrucPerspective 1 3 BEAM 3 5
StrucPerspective 2 3 COLUMN 6 10
StrucPerspective 3 3 VOLUME 7 12
399
________________
400
________________ Search Criteria for VHL
10. Search Criteria for VHL

This command allows you to define the search criteria used to create symbology based VHL
drawings. Refer to Symbology Based VHL Drawings, page 391 for more information.
When you select the Search Criteria for VHL command from the Drawing Management
form, the Search Criteria Data form is displayed.
Criteria For VHL

10.Search
Use this form to create, copy, revise or delete VHL search criteria for piping and equipment.
This command only assigns search criteria for Piping and Equipment models.
Search criteria for HVAC, FrameWorks Plus and EE Raceway must be defined
directly in the Access database.
Options
Create Displays the Search Criteria Data Creation form, which adds a new record
of a VHL search criteria file in the Access database.
Copy Displays the Search Criteria Data File Revision form, which copies the
record of an existing VHL search criteria file from the Access database and copies the
corresponding data file.
Revise Displays the Search Criteria Data File Revision form, which modifies an
existing record of a VHL search criteria file in the Access database.
401
________________
Delete Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing VHL search criteria
file as well as its associated record in the Access database.
402
10.1 Search Criteria Data Creation Form

When you choose Create from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria Data
This form creates a VHL search criteria data file in a specified directory. It also creates a
corresponding record in the Access database.
Fields and Options
Criteria For VHL

10.Search

File Specification The file name (up to 14 characters) of the search criteria data file
to be created.
active settings.
File Node The nodename of the system on which the search criteria data file is
403
________________


Equipment Search Criteria Displays the Search Criteria - Equipment/Nozzle

form, which defines the equipment VHL search criteria.
Operating Sequence
1. From the Search Criteria Data form, click Create
The Search Criteria Data Creation form is displayed.
node.
Accept.
404
After including any models or search criteria for the search criteria data file,
you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the search
criteria data file is not actually created until you click Accept on the Search
Criteria Data Creation form.
Criteria For VHL

10.Search
405
________________
10.2 Search Criteria Data Revision Form

When you choose Copy or Revise from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria
Data File Revision form is displayed.
This form revises an existing search criteria data file. It also copies an existing search criteria
Fields and Options


File Specification The file name, up to 14 characters, of the search criteria file to be
created.
active settings.

Define Volume Displays the Volume Definition form, which specifies the
coordinates of a design volume cube for reporting. For more information, see The
Define Volume Form.
406
________________ Search Criteria Data Revision Form

Operating Sequence
1. From the Search Criteria Data form, select Copy or Revise.
The Search Criteria Data File Revision form is displayed, with a list of available data
files.
Criteria For VHL

10.Search
2. From the displayed list, select a data file to be copied or revised. Then click Accept.
node.
4. Select additional options as needed to define the report search criteria data. Then click
Accept.
407
________________
10.3 Search Criteria Deletion Form

records.
Fields and Options

Operating Sequence
408
________________ Search Criteria Deletion Form
Criteria For VHL

10.Search
409
________________
410
________________ Plot Manager
11. Plot Manager

This command provides a PDS-specific plotting interface for drawings external to the
graphics environment. It is used to control reference model display, category display within
the reference models, and category display within the drawing independently of the default or
active settings in the drawing being plotted. The drawplotsize file in the project directory
contains the default Drawing Plot Size Table. The drawplotsize file can be modified; refer to
Drawing Plot Size, page 31 for more information.
Plot Manager provides the following options:
Display levels for all reference models associated with a specified drawing can be set
On or Off.
Display levels for all reference models associated with a specified drawing view can be
set On or Off.
Individual reference model display levels associated with a specific drawing view can
be set On or Off.
To plot a drawing using Plot Manager, you must first have a plot queue. Plot queues are
created automatically when the software is installed.
Plot Manager automatically displays the date and time for the following events:
The most recent activation of the hidden-line graphics process. The date and time will
be preceded by the text VHL:. The data and time will be added to the drawing.
The plotting process. The date and time will be preceded by the text Plotted:.
Although the date and time will be plotted on the hard copy of the drawing, the text will
not be added to the actual drawing file.
Through Project Data Manager, you can define the size, font, color, and weight of the text
that displays this information. This text will be displayed on the unique "VHL/Plot
Date/Time" drawing category. If the symbology options for this feature are not defined, the
following defaults will be used:
Text Size - uses drawings active character size

11.Plot Manager
Text Font - uses text font for coordinate labels
Color - set to zero (0)
Weight - set to zero (0)
411
________________
11.1 Plot Drawing

The Plot Manager automatically determines the plot size using the Drawing Plot Size Table
in the project directory on the basis of the drawing size. This command specifies the drawing
type and drawing to be plotted. There is also an option for including or removing reference
models. Four optional queues, besides the default queue, can be created and defined.
Steps
1. Select Plot Manager from the Drawing Management form.
The system displays the Plot Manager form with a Drawing Type display list.
Select the drawing type of drawing(s) you wish to plot, and select Accept to accept.
The system displays a Drawings display list.
412
________________ Plot Drawing
3. Select Drawing
Select all of the drawings to be plotted, and select Accept
The system activates a form with I/Plot parameter file options and process and queue
options. The system will automatically load the plot queue, plot size, levels, and design
file name in the I/Plot parameter file you select.
Refer to the Queue Setup section for information on creating and

defining queues.
4. Accept to Submit or Select Option
Select Accept if submitting immediately with the default parameters file to the default
queue.
OR
Select an I/Plot Parameters file to be included with your drawing. If no parameters file
is selected, the system will use the default file.
Select a plot queue. If no queue is selected, the system will use the Default queue.
Specify the number of copies to be plotted; the default value for this field is 1.
Select a scale factor, if desired. The default size is 1.0 (full size); you may enter any
11.Plot Manager
positive number less than 1.0 if you would like to plot a smaller drawing for checking
purposes.
Set the No Rotation / Rotate 90 Degrees toggle to the desired position.
Set the Default Categories and Reference Models / Select Categories and Reference
Models toggle to the appropriate position.
413
________________
The default position tells the system to use the categories specified for
that drawing type in the Project Setup form. If no default categories
exist for that drawing type, the actively displayed categories will be
plotted.
This commands default toggle setting is different from the default setting of the
Plot command in the graphics environment.
Toggle from Submit Immediately to Submission is Delayed to specify the time to

submit the plotted drawing.
THEN
Select Accept to submit with the chosen options.
If Default Categories and Reference Models is selected, the system processes the
drawings, and sends the data to the plot queue for plotting.
If Select Categories and Reference Models is selected, the system processes the
drawing information and displays a list of drawing views associated with the specified
drawing. The options used to specify the categories to be turned on or off are
displayed.
5. Select Option or Select Drawing View
Select the Drawing Categories option to review the list of drawing categories that are
currently displayed in the view and to specify the categories to be turned on or off.
Refer to the
Drawing Categories section for more information.
OR
Select the drawing view and the Reference Models option to review and specify the
categories to be turned on or off for individual reference models associated with the
specific drawing view being plotted. Refer to the Reference Models section for more
414
________________ Plot Drawing
information.
OR
Select All Reference Models Display OFF to specify that the categories displayed for
all reference models associated with the selected drawing be turned off for the drawing
plot.
OR
Select All Reference Models Display ON to specify that the categories displayed for
all reference models associated with the selected drawing be turned on for the drawing
plot.
6. Select Accept to accept the specified plot processing information.
The system processes the information and submits the plotted drawing to the plot queue
at the time previously specified.
7. Select Cancel to exit the form. To exit the form without submitting the plots, select the
Shell or Top buttons.
The actual drawing size is set by the plot queue in relation to the plot
size.
11.Plot Manager
415
________________
11.1.1 Drawing Categories

This option activates the Drawing Categories form. It is used to specify the categories to be
turned on or off for the drawing plot. The categories that are turned on are highlighted. When
you select a highlighted category, the highlight is removed to indicate that the category is
turned off.
Select Category Select the categories to turn off or on for the drawing to
be plotted, and select Accept to accept the selected
categories.
416
11.1.2 Reference Models

This option activates the Reference Models form. It is used to select reference models and
review and specify the individual reference model categories to be turned on or off for the
specific drawing view being plotted.

The drawing view must be selected from the top of the Plot Manager form.
Commands
All Reference Models Display OFF Specifies that the categories displayed for all
of the reference models associated with the drawing view be turned off for the drawing
plot.
All Reference Models Display ON Specifies that the categories displayed for all of
the reference models associated with the drawing view to be turned on for the drawing
plot.
Reference Model Categories Reviews and specifies the categories to be turned on

or off for a specific reference model.
11.Plot Manager
Field Descriptions
Disc/Model Name Displays the available models available for plotting.
417
________________
Steps
1. Select the Reference Models option from the Plot Manager form.
The system activates the Reference Models form with a list of reference models for the
specified drawing view to be plotted.
2. Select Option or Select Reference Model
Select All Reference Models Display OFF to specify that the categories displayed for
all of the reference models associated with the drawing view be turned off for the
drawing plot.
OR
Select All Reference Models Display ON to specify that the categories displayed for
all of the reference models associated with the drawing view be turned on for the
drawing plot.
OR
Select the desired reference model from the list of models at the top of the form, and
select the Reference Model Categories option to review and specify the categories to
be turned on or off for a specific reference model.
The system activates the Review Model Categories form.
The categories that are turned on are highlighted. When you select a highlighted
category, the highlight is removed to indicate that the category is turned off.
3. Select Category
Select the categories that you wish to turn off or on for the drawing to be plotted.
418
4. Select Accept to accept the specified categories to be turned on or off.
The system processes the specified drawing plot information and returns to the Plot
Manager form.
11.Plot Manager
419
________________
420
________________ Project Planner
12. Project Planner

The Project Planner option activates the interactive graphics environment to allow you to
create unassigned drawing views. After an unassigned view is created, it can be assigned to
only one drawing.
Operating Sequence
1. Select Project Planner from the Drawing Management form.
2. The first time you select this option, the system prompts
Key plan file does not exist, Accept to Create
Select Accept to create the project key plan model.
The system copies the model seed file to the file keyplan.dgn in the project directory.
Key Plan model successfully created
The system activates the graphics command environment for the project key plan
model.
Refer to the description of the graphics environment in the Drawing

Composition/Annotation section for more information on working in graphics.
Planner
12.Project
421
________________
12.1 Project Planner Command Menu
The command menu at the bottom of the screen provides fast access to commonly used
MicroStation and PDS commands. The following commands are available on the Project
Planner Command Menu.
PlotPlan The Plot Plan commands create unassigned drawing views, and allow
specification of viewing options.
View This pull-down provides view manipulations. All of these commands result
in modifying what is seen in selected views. These commands only manipulate the
view of the model but do not manipulate the actual model.
File This pull-down provides basic file manipulation commands, such as

compressing and exiting the file. It also includes commands which allow you to plot
drawings or select another drawing.
Element This pull-down provides the Analyze command used to open the Element
Information settings box.
Settings This pull-down provides the ability to modify rendering, fonts and colors
used during a graphics session.
User This pull-down allows you to modify things that apply only to your system
such as how memory is used on your system, how windows are displayed, how various
items on the screen are laid out and behave, how reference files are attached by default,
and so on. As the name implies, you can adjust these settings to suit your preferences.
422
________________ PlotPlan
12.1.1 PlotPlan
Commands
Drawing Views Activates the form used to create unassigned drawing views.
Viewing Options Activates a form consisting of viewing options.
Exit Exits Project Planner, and returns you to the Drawing Management menu.
Planner
12.Project
423
________________
12.1.1.1 Drawing Views

This command activates the Create Unassigned Drawing Views form. It is used to create a
drawing view. You can specify the drawing view by using a saved view definition created for
a screen view in the model, selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume
coordinates to be used, or defining a volume about a specified named item. This command
also specifies the active category data for the drawing view.
Commands
Standard View Buttons Define the orientation of the drawing view. These buttons
include: Plan, Looking East, Looking North, Isometric, Looking West, Looking
South, and Plan (Vertical).
Delete Unassigned Views Deletes an existing unassigned view.
Update Views Updates the screen display for the unassigned drawing views.
Select Model Identifies the model file for the unassigned drawing view to be
created.
Named Item Uses the coordinates and clipping volume of a named item to define
them for the drawing view.
Saved View Uses coordinates and clipping volume of the saved view to define them
for the drawing view.
Graphic Symbology Defines the graphic symbology for the Key Plan model.
424
________________ Drawing Views
Field Descriptions
View Number Key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 6 characters) for
the unassigned drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the number is
unique within the project.
View Name Key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40 characters)
associated with the specified drawing view.
View Scale The system displays a scale display list. Select a new scale value for the
view to be created.
Model Number Key in the model number to identify the model for the unassigned
drawing view or select the Select Model option from the bottom of the form to select
the model from a series of forms.
Drawing View Volume fields The Low and High columns and the Easting,
Northing, and Elevation fields display the volume for the drawing view.

Steps
1. Select the Drawing Views command from the panel menu.
The system activates the Create Unassigned Drawing Views form.
2. Specify the required view information for the drawing view being created.
3. Select one of the seven view orientation options from the center of the form.
4. Select the Drawing View Volume fields and key in the absolute Easting, Northing,
and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X X".
elevation.)
Then, key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second
point.
OR
Select the Saved View option to use a model saved view to define the orientation and
clipping volume of the drawing view. Key in the name of the saved view for the model
specified in the Model Number field.
Planner
12.Project
425
________________
OR
Select the Named Item option to use a pre-defined named item to define the clipping
volume for the drawing view. (See the section describing the Named Item
option.)
5. Accept or Select Other Options
Accept the displayed coordinate values.
Creating Drawing View
426
________________ Delete Unassigned View
12.1.1.1.1 Delete Unassigned View

This option activates the Delete Unassigned View form. It is used to delete an
existing unassigned drawing view.
Field Descriptions
Orientation: Displays all of the possible orientations for a drawing
view.
Number/Name Displays all of the unassigned drawing views for a

selected orientation.
Steps
1. Select the Delete Unassigned View option from the Create Unassigned
Drawing Views form.
The system displays the Delete Unassigned Views form.
2. Select Orientation
Select the view orientation for the unassigned drawing view to be deleted.
The system displays the unassigned drawing views for the selected
orientation.
OR
No Unassigned Drawing View Defined If there are no views for the

selected orientation.
Planner
12.Project
427
________________
3. Select Unassigned Views
Select the unassigned drawing views to be deleted and select Accept.
The system deletes the selected view and updates the form.
428
________________ Update Views
12.1.1.1.2 Update Views

This option updates the screen display for the unassigned drawing views.
Planner
12.Project
429
________________
12.1.1.1.3 Select Model

This option identifies the model file for the unassigned drawing view to be created.
1. The system displays the disciplines for the active project.
Select Discipline or Exit
Select the discipline for the model file and select Accept.
The system displays the Design Area display list for the selected discipline.
2. Select Area or Exit
Select the design area for the model file and select Accept.
3. Select Model
Select the model file and select Accept.
430
________________ Named Item
12.1.1.1.4 Named Item

This option activates the Create View Of Named Item form. It uses pre-defined named item
to specify the data coordinates and clipping volume to be used in the drawing view.

The view number and name of the unassigned drawing view to be created must be specified in
the Create Unassigned Drawing View form.
The appropriate name attribute must have been defined for the item.
Steps
1. Select the Named Item option from the Create Unassigned Drawing View form.
The system activates the Create View Of Named Item form.
2. Specify Tag Number
Select and key in the appropriate item number to specify either the Piping Component
Number, Engineered Item Number, Instrument Tag Number, Equipment
Number, or Nozzle Number of the specified item.
For an equipment nozzle, the system also prompts for the equipment
group number.
The system displays the Delta Coordinates associated with the named item.
These coordinates define the distance from the center to the edges of the cube which fits
the named item. You can change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed
Planner
12.Project
431
________________
clipping volume.
Accept the displayed values.
The system returns to the Create Drawing View form and updates the coordinate
values.
432
________________ Graphic Symbology
12.1.1.1.5 Graphic Symbology

This option activates the Project Key Plan Graphic Symbology form. It is used to define
the graphic symbology (level, color, line weight, and line style) for the Key Plan model.
Steps
1. Select the Graphic Symbology option from the Create Unassigned Drawing View
form.
The system activates the Project Key Plan Graphic Symbology form.
2. Select the field for the symbology value to be revised.
3. Level
Place a data point along the slider to set the MicroStation display level.
Color
The system activates the Select Color form which displays the active color settings for
the project. Select the color from the form and select Accept.
Planner
12.Project
433
________________
Weight
Place a data point along the slider to set the weight.
Select Symbology
Select the desired symbology option.
4. Accept the specified symbology changes.
434
________________ Viewing Options
12.1.1.2 Viewing Options

This command provides access to a set of options that allow you to manipulate the model
views for each screen or window.
Planner
12.Project
435
________________
12.1.1.2.1 Set View Orientation

The Plan View, Iso View, Looking North, Looking South, Looking East, and
Looking West commands allow you to set the view orientation to one of the
standard viewing directions. You can specify more than one screen with the
same view.
The default screen orientations are:
Plan View Orients a screen to the plan view orientation.
Isometric View Orients a screen to the isometric viewing direction.
Looking North Orients a screen view looking north.
Looking South Orients a screen view looking south.
Looking East Orients a screen view looking east.
Looking West Orients a screen view looking west.
436
________________ Update Window
12.1.1.2.2 Update Window

The Update View commands updates the screen display for a virtual screen or a specified
view.
Update Both Updates both (left and right) virtual screens.
Update View Updates the selected window view. The system prompts you to select
the view to update.
Update Left Updates the left virtual screen.
Update Right Updates the right virtual screen.
Planner
12.Project
437
________________
12.1.1.2.3 Rotate About View

The Rotate About View commands allow you to rotate a view about the
selected axis (X, Y or Z). The angle follows the Right Hand Rule with the
thumb pointing toward the positive axis.
Rotate About X Axis Rotates the horizontal axis of a screen view

counter-clockwise.
Rotate About Y Axis Rotates the vertical axis of a screen view

counter-clockwise.
Rotate About Z Axis Rotates the X and Y axes of a screen view

counter-clockwise.
438
________________ Match Planar Element
12.1.1.2.4 Match Planar Element

The Match Planar Element command allows you to establish a view normal to a planar
element.
Planner
12.Project
439
________________
12.1.1.2.5 Rotation 3 Points

The Rotation 3 Points command allows you to rotate the view orientation so that you are
looking normal to the X and Y planes defined by the three points. The first two data points
define the X axis. The line between the first and third data points define the Y axis.
Enter first point @x axis origin Place a data point to define the origin of
the X axis.
Enter second point on x axis Place a data point to define the positive
direction of the X axis.
Enter point to define y axis Place the third data point to define the Y
axis. The viewing plane will be parallel
to the plane defined by the three data
points.
440
________________ Dialog View Rotation
12.1.1.2.6 Dialog View Rotation

This command activates the MicroStation View Rotation dialog box.
Planner
12.Project
441
________________
12.1.1.2.7 Color Shading

The Permanent Color Shading and Color Shading options are used to render
the contents of a screen view. When you select either of the color shading
options the system displays a list of render options.
Select the option for the type of rendering to be performed and select the screen
view to be processed.
For Permanent Color Shading, select a view number from the form (1-
8). The selected view will display with the specified render option until
you change it.
For Color Shading, place a data point in the screen view to be updated.
The rendered view will revert to wireframe display when it is updated.
Wiremesh
This option renders the contents of a view(s) as a wiremesh display. Wiremesh
display is similar to the default wireframe display in that all elements are
transparent and do not obscure other elements. In a wiremesh display, however,
curved surfaces are represented by a polygonal mesh rather than a simple
wireframe. This representation can increase the realism of curved surfaces,
although it may also increase the amount of clutter as more lines are displayed
for surfaces that would normally be hidden.
442
________________ Color Shading
Cross-Section
This option renders the contents of a view as a cross-section. If an auxiliary
coordinate system (ACS) is active, the cross-section is cut at the X-Y plane of
the ACS. Otherwise it is cut at the views active depth (parallel to the view).
Hidden Line
This option renders the contents of a view as a polygon display. In a polygon
display, only parts of elements that would actually be visible are displayed.
Lines hidden behind objects are removed to create a more realistic
representation. MicroStation accomplishes this by decomposing each element
into polygons. Hidden line removal processing is much slower than wireframe
and wiremesh display, and the processing time is roughly equivalent to the
other, more realistic type of rendering.
Filled Hidden Line

This option renders the contents of a view as a filled polygon display. A filled
polygon display is identical to a polygon display except that the polygons are
filled with element color. This creates an interesting cartoon-like effect that may
be useful in some circumstances, particularly if the hardware can display only a
limited number of colors.
Constant Shading
This option renders the contents of a view as a constant shaded model. In a
constant shaded model, each element is displayed as one or more polygons filled
with a single (constant) color. The color is computed once for each polygon
from the element color, material characteristics, and lighting configuration (see
3D concepts in the users guide). Curved surfaces are decomposed into a mesh
of polygons. Each polygon is shaded with a single color and surfaces appear
tiled.
Smooth Shading
This option renders the contents of a view as a smooth (Gouraud) shaded model.
In smooth shaded models, the appearance of curved surfaces is more realistic
than in constant shaded models because polygon color is computed at polygon
boundaries and color is blended across polygon interiors. This gives surfaces a
smooth appearance.
Planner
12.Project
443
________________
Phong Shading
This option renders the contents of a view as a Phong shaded model. This is the
most realistic type of rendering supported by MicroStation.
In a Phong shaded model, the color of each pixel is recomputed. Phong shading
is useful for producing high-quality images when speed is not critical and very
exact lighting effects are desired. If light sources are close to the objects being
rendered, such as a spotlight shining on a home, Phong shading may be the only
way to see the exact location of the light beam.
Large numbers of computations slow display time considerably. In most

instances, Phong shaded models are very similar to smooth shaded models and
do not justify the increased processing time.
Stereo
This option renders the contents of a view as a 3D image. It creates a stereo pair
of images and merges the two images into a single image, which you can view
by wearing red/blue glasses. Put on the red/blue glasses making sure that the red
lens is over the left eye and the blue lens is over the right eye. View the image
with your eyes level and square to the screen.
444
________________ Camera View
12.1.1.2.8 Camera View

This option activates five options used to define the target, position, and clipping planes for a
view camera.
Camera Setup
This option lets you set the target, position, and clipping planes for a view camera and turn on
the camera for the view. The camera lens is set with the Camera Lens option.
To define the camera target use a data point. The point becomes the focal point (center) of the
view. Objects beyond the target point will appear smaller due to the nature of the perspective
projection. Objects in front of the target point will appear larger and may be excluded from
the viewing pyramid.
Place a data point to define the camera position. A dynamic pyramid displays to show the
viewing volume with the camera at the pointer location.
Place a data point to define the front clipping plane (display depth). Any elements or portions
of elements in front of this plane are not displayed.
Place a final data point to define the back clipping plane (display depth). Any elements or
portions of elements beyond this plane are not displayed, but the view is turned on.
Planner
12.Project
445
________________
Camera Target
This option lets you set the target of a view camera without changing the camera position.
This is like standing in one position and moving the camera to view different targets.
Camera Position
This option lets you set the position of a view camera without changing the camera target.
This is like focusing the camera at an object and moving around to obtain different views of
the object.
Camera Lens
This option activates the camera lens settings display list. This list lets you set the angles and
focal lengths of view camera lenses.
The camera lens settings displayed are for the view chosen from the view number option.
Angle/Focal Length
The lens angle for the camera of the chosen view can be specified in degrees or as the lens
focal length in millimeters (mm). You can also specify the lens by choosing a standard lens
from the Standard option menu. The angles and focal lengths of the standard lenses are:
Standard Lens Angle Focal Length (mm)
Fisheye 93.3 20
Extra Wide 74.3 28
Wide 62.4 35
Normal 46.0 50
Portrait 28.0 85
Telephoto 12.1 200
Telescopic 2.4 1000
Camera Off
This option turns the camera view off.
446
________________ Views
12.1.1.2.9 Views
The Views commands allow you to manipulate views between two specified windows.
Copy View copies a selected view display from one window to another.
Swap View option allows you to change from either the right or left screen display.
View On option activates eight view options which correspond to the window views
(1-4) on the right screen and window views (5-8) on the left screen.
View Off option allows you to select and place a data point in the window views to
turn specified views off.
Planner
12.Project
447
________________
12.1.1.2.10 Level Symbology On

This command provides the option to enable the display of reference models
with the active reference model symbology.
448
________________ Level Symbology Off
12.1.1.2.11 Level Symbology Off

This command provides the option to disable the display of reference models with the active
Planner
12.Project
449
________________
12.1.1.2.12 Form Left/Right Screen

The Form Left Screen / Form Right Screen toggle sets forms to be automatically displayed
on the right (front) screen or the left (back) screen. This option is only relevant for dual-screen
configurations.
450
________________ Exit
12.1.1.3 Exit
Planner
12.Project
451
________________
12.1.2 View
Refer to View, page 195 for a description of the Viewing commands. The Viewing
commands on this palette are the same commands as the ones appearing on the Viewing
command palette for Composition/Annotation, with the exception of Viewing Options. The
Viewing Options palette contains the same commands as described earlier in this chapter for
the PlotPlan command palette. Refer to Viewing Options, page 435 for a description of the
Viewing Options commands.
452
________________ File
12.1.3 File
Commands
File Design Saves the active parameters defined in the current design session.
Exit Exits the design file.
Planner
12.Project
453
________________
12.1.3.1 File Design

The File Design command allows you to save the active parameters defined in the current
design session. This command saves:
MicroStation parameters such as active views and active display volumes.
PDS parameters such as active segment parameters. It also saves the screen location of
the Piping Designer base form.
454
________________ Exit
12.1.3.2 Exit
Planner
12.Project
455
________________
456
________________ Project Setup
13. Project Setup
13.Project Setup
This option activates the Project Setup form. It provides various options to define defaults
for all drawings created in a project. It also provides fields that allow you to set up drawing
directories, network address name, drawing scale, and drawing size for each drawing type.
These fields, displayed on the right side of the form, can be used independently of the options
at the top of the form. If only these fields are defined, all reference categories and drawing
types are available when you create a drawing. There can only be one default directory for
each drawing type.
There are also fields available for entering the cell library name, directory, and network
address of the cell library to be used for annotation in the drawings. Each drawing type may
use either the project cell library or an alternate cell library. For more information about cells,
the project cell library, and alternate cell libraries, refer to Drawing Manager Theory of
Operation, page 26.
Once any of the options are used, the system displays only the defined reference
categories (disciplines) and model data display categories for the drawings of that
drawing type. Reference models that are attached to drawings not in the defined
reference categories, will not be availabel for selection as reference models.
Commands
Drawing Type Displays the project drawing types. Refer to Drawing Type, page
Reference Categories Defines a default list of reference-model data categories that

determines which levels in an attached model are on and off for a drawing type. It also
filters models with the definitions specified using the Automatic Attach & Verify
option. See Automatic Attach & Verify, page 275 for more information.
457
________________
Copy Drawing Type Copies an existing project setup. Refer to Copy Drawing
Type, page 466 for more information.
Remove Reference Removes all reference model data categories in a given

drawing type which were previously defined using the Reference Categories option for
the project. See Remove Reference, page 468 for more information.
Plotting Categories Specifies which levels in a drawing are to be plotted for a

specific drawing type. You can remove data categories from the plotting list by placing
a data point on the appropriate category names. See Plotting Categories, page 469 for
more information.
Label Filter Specifies which labels will be available for annotation of a specific
drawing type. You can remove labels from the display list by placing a data point on
the appropriate label names. See Label Filter, page 470 for more information.
Field Descriptions
All Project Setup options have the following fields on their forms:
Drawing Directory Key in the location of the directory to contain the drawing file.
Network Address Key in the node address of the workstation to contain the drawing
file.
Drawing Scale Select a value from the display list of plotted scales for the drawing.
This sets the default scale factor. You can change the scale when you create/revise each
drawing. The scale factors are in the Standard Note Library. The scale of the drawing
view can be modified at time of creation.
English Units - m m" = n n" Where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the
scale on the model. For example, 1/4"=1 indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing
represents 1 foot in the model.
Metric Units - n:nn Where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on the
the model.
Drawing Size Select either A, B, C, D, E, or F from the display list of border sizes.
458
________________ Project Setup
Refer to the section on Drawing Plot Size Table in the Drawing Manager Setup section
for information on the drawing border reference files for the various sizes and drawing
types.
13.Project Setup
English
A 8 1/2 X 11
B 11 X 17
C 17 X 22
D 22 X 34
E 34 X 44
F 28 X 40
Metric
A0 840mm X 1189mm
A1 595mm X 840mm
A2 420mm X 595mm
A3 297mm X 420mm
A4 210mm X 297mm
Cell Library Name Key in the name of an alternate cell library to be used for this
drawing type. If nothing is entered here, the project cell library will be chosen by
default.
Cell Directory Specifies the directory in which the cell library resides.
Cell Network Address Specifies the network address of the machine on which the
cell library resides.
Project Seed File/Alternate Seed File Specifies whether the project seed drawing
or an alternate seed drawing is to be used in creating drawings. The alternate seed
drawings, named draw_seed.<drawing_type>, will be created in the project directory.
See Seed Files, page 33 for more information on this option.
Steps
1. Select the Project Setup command from the Drawing Management form.
The system displays the Project Setup form with a Drawing Type display list.
2. Select the Drawing Type option from the Project Setup form.
The system activates a scrolling list of drawing types, and expects a specific type to be
selected before further action can be taken. When a drawing type is selected, the
system activates a form that allows you to key in the defaults of the selected drawing
type.
If there is a drawing category whose default values you would like to copy, select the
Copy Drawing Type option. This option will display a scrolling list of drawing types.
When a drawing type is selected from this list and the form is confirmed, the system
will copy the default location, scale, size, and cell information of that drawing type into
the fields of the previously-selected drawing type.
459
________________
3. Select the Reference Categories or Remove Reference option.
The system activates a form which allows you to modify a list of reference categories to
remove or include when creating a drawing in the project.
4. Select the Plotting Categories option.
The system activates a form which allows you to pick plotting categories to remove or
include when creating a drawing in the project.
5. Select the Label Filter option.
The system activates a form which allows you to pick annotation labels thta will be
displayed on the label placement forms in the graphics environment.
6. Select the Project Seed File / Alternate Seed File toggle setting that is appropriate for
this drawing type.
460
________________ Drawing Type
13.1 Drawing Type
13.Project Setup
This option activates the Drawing Type field. It is used to define the default settings for each
drawing in a new project.
Steps
1. Select the Project Setup option from the Drawing Management form.
The system displays the Project Setup form and the Drawing Type display list.
2. Specify Drawing Type
Select a drawing type from the list. You can have one default directory for each
available drawing type in your project.
3. Specify the default drawing file pathname/network address.
4. Select the Reference Categories option to add reference categories to define which
disciplines will be displayed in the drawings of the specified drawing type. See
Reference Categories, page 463 for more information.
5. Select the Remove Reference option to remove reference categories so that the models
within the specified disciplines will not be displayed in the drawings created in this
directory. See Remove Reference, page 468 for more information.
6. Accept or Reject
Accept the Project Setup and return to the Drawing Management form.
461
________________
OR
Select Cancel to exit and return to the Drawing Management form.
462
________________ Reference Categories
13.2 Reference Categories
13.Project Setup
This option activates a Reference Categories display list. It is used to determine the default
disciplines that are available to be attached to a view when reference files are attached.
It is also used to select the default reference categories and model data display categories for a
specified drawing type. These categories can be toggled to on or off by highlighting or de-
highlighting them.
Like all of the other options on the Project Setup form, this option first displays a list of
reference categories. It then allows you to selectively set the default model data display
categories.
If a discipline is not selected, it will not appear in the list of disciplines

available for attachment.
Steps
1. Select the Reference Categories option to define reference models for the default
drawing setup.
The system activates the Reference Categories display list.
2. Select a category and select Accept.
The system displays a list of available reference model data display categories, and
indicates whether listed categories are turned On or Off during the drawing view
creation and during VHL processing.
463
________________
3. You may control all categories for drawing view creation and VHL by using the Turn
on All Create Categories and the Turn on All VHL Categories options.
You may also toggle selected categories Off or On for drawing view creation and/or
VHL processing by placing a data point on the current setting. When the categories are
turned off, they are no longer highlighted.
Turning a category On for creation means that whenever a drawing view is created, the
specified category will be displayed in the drawing view.
Turning a category On for VHL means that the specified category will be processed for
VHL. Turning a category Off for VHL means that the specified category will be
ignored by VHL.
4. You may also override the default symbology for the active discipline by using the
Define Reference Symbology command. This will allow each disciplines reference
file symbology to be set for display, VHL (and, therefore, plotting). When the default
symbology is used, the toggles on this form are all set to Disabled.
Toggling Color to the Enabled setting activates the Reference Model Symbology
Color form. This form allows you to select which color you would like to use to
represent the active discipline. These settings are used for the categories set to On for
VHL.
464
________________ Reference Categories
Toggling Style to the Enabled setting displays the available line styles. This allows
you to select which line style you would like to use to represent the active discipline.
13.Project Setup
Toggling Weight to the Enabled setting displays the available line weights. This
allows you to select which line weight you would like to use to represent the active
discipline.
Set the symbology options to obtain the desired effects.
THEN
Select Accept to return to the Project Setup form.
OR
Select Cancel to return to the Project Setup form and discard all changes.
The user-defined reference symbology settings for VHL in this form apply
only to the visible edges from the VHL output. Refer to the Hidden Line
Data section in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for
more information about setting user-defined symbology for the hidden lines
(as opposed to the visible edges).
465
________________
13.3 Copy Drawing Type

This option activates the Copy Drawing Type field. It is used to copy previously defined
defaults for the drawings in a specified drawing type directory for use in drawings in another
drawing type. The default reference categories and model data display categories can then be
modified.
Steps
1. Select the Project Setup option from the Drawing Management form.
The system displays the Project Setup form and a Drawing Type list with a list of the
drawing types that have been defined.
2. Select the Copy Drawing Type option.
The system displays a Drawing Type display list with the drawing types that have
previously defined project setups.
3. Specify Drawing Type
Select the drawing type of the project setup to be copied.
The system automatically displays the information for that project setup.
4. Select the Drawing Type option.
5. Select the new drawing type for the copied project setup.
466
________________ Copy Drawing Type
6. Key in any modification to the location and size fields.
7. Select the Reference Categories option to modify reference categories and model data
display categories for the drawing type in the specified directory. See Reference
13.Project Setup
Categories, page 463 for more information.
8. Select the Remove Reference option to remove reference categories from the drawing
type in the specified directory. See Remove Reference, page 468 for more information.
9. Accept the Project Setup and return to the Drawing Management form.
OR
Select Cancel to exit and return to the Drawing Management form.
467
________________
13.4 Remove Reference

This option activates a Remove Reference display list. It is used to remove reference
categories for the project setup default for creating a drawing or drawing view in a specified
drawing type. This command removes the default model disciplines defined by the Reference
Categories command or those included in a copied project setup.
Steps
1. Select the Remove Reference option to remove reference model definitions from the
project setup.
The system displays the Remove Reference display list that contains all of the
categories that are defined for the project.
2. Select Disciplines to Remove and Accept
Select the categories to remove and select Accept.
OR
468
________________ Plotting Categories
13.5 Plotting Categories
13.Project Setup
This option activates a Plotting Categories display list. It is used to specify which levels in
an attached model are to be plotted for a specific drawing type.
Steps
1. Select the Plotting Categories option to remove plotting category definitions from the
project setup.
The system displays the Plotting Categories display list that contains all of the
categories that are defined to be plotted for the project.
2. Select Categories to Remove and Accept
Select the categories to remove and select Accept.
OR
469
________________
13.6 Label Filter

This option activates a Label Filter display list. It is used to specify which types of labels
will be displayed for a specific drawing type.
Steps
1. Select the Label Filter option to remove labels from the list.
The system displays the display list that contains all of the labels that are defined to be
displayed for the project.
2. Select Labels to Remove and Accept
Select the labels to remove and select Accept.
OR
470
________________ Plot Setup Manager
14. Plot Setup Manager

This option activates the I/Plot Parameter Files form. It is used to create I/Plot Parameter
records. Specifically, the Plot Manager sets the following I/Plot options automatically on the
basis of available drawing management data: Queue, View, Region, Units, X Size, Y Size,
Scale, Data Rescale, Rotation, Design, and Levels.
To select any other I/Plot options, the I/Plot Parameter records must be pre-defined in the
Project Control Database, and the I/Plot Parameter files must be created using the I/Plot
product.
Manager
14.Plot Setup
Commands
Create Creates I/Plot Parameter records. This option is activated by default when
the form appears. See the Create I/Plot Parameter File, page 473 section for more
information.
Revise Revises existing I/Plot Parameter records. See the Revise I/Plot Parameter
File, page 475 section for more information.
Delete Deletes existing I/Plot Parameter records. See the Delete I/Plot Parameter
File, page 477 section for more information.
471
________________
Field Descriptions
I/Plot Number Defines the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to be
created (an alphanumeric value up to 24 characters long).
Special characters such as & $ @ - / . + = # * and a blank space cannot

be used to define the I/Plot number.
I/Plot Description Defines the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumeric
value up to 40 characters).
File Specification Defines the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14

characters).
Path Name Defines directory path (up to 36 characters) specifying the directory to
contain the parameter file.
Workstation/Server Name Defines the workstation node address to contain the

drawing file (an alphanumeric value up to 26 characters).
Steps
1. Select the Plot Setup Manager option from the Drawing Management form.
The system displays the I/Plot Parameter File form.
2. Select one of the options.
OR
472
________________ Create I/Plot Parameter File
14.1 Create I/Plot Parameter File

This command is used to define the name, description, and the full file specification for an
I/Plot Parameter file. You can choose from any of the I/Plot Parameter files created with the
Plot Setup Manager at the time of plotting, otherwise the system will use the default I/Plot
Parameter file.
Manager
14.Plot Setup
Field Descriptions
I/Plot Number Defines the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to be
created (an alphanumeric value up to 24 characters).
Special characters such as & $ @ - / . + = # * and blank spaces cannot

I/Plot Description Defines the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumeric
File Specification Defines the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14

characters).
Path Name Defines the directory path specifying the directory to contain the
parameter file (up to 36 characters).
Workstation/Server Name Defines the workstation node address to contain the

473
________________
Steps
1. Specify I/Plot Number
Key in the I/Plot identification and location information.
2. Select Accept to create the I/Plot Parameter file.
OR
474
________________ Revise I/Plot Parameter File
14.2 Revise I/Plot Parameter File

This command activates an I/Plot Parameter File display list. It is used to select a parameter
file to revise. One or all of the fields can be revised using this option.
Manager
14.Plot Setup
Field Descriptions
I/Plot Number Displays the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to be
revised (an alphanumeric value up to 24 characters).

I/Plot Description Displays the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumeric
File Specification Displays the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14

characters).
Path Name Displays the directory path specifying the directory location to contain
the parameter file (up to 36 characters)
Workstation/Server Name Displays the workstation node address to contain the

Steps
1. Select the Revise option from the I/Plot Parameter File form.
The system displays a list of the existing parameter files.
475
________________
2. Select I/Plot Parameter for Revision
Select the parameter file to be revised.
The system displays the information on the file selected.
3. Revise I/Plot Data
Place a data point in the field to be changed and key in the new information.
4. Select Accept to effect the changes to the I/Plot Parameter file.
OR
476
________________ Delete I/Plot Parameter File
14.3 Delete I/Plot Parameter File

This command activates an I/Plot Parameter File display list. It is used to select the
parameter file to delete. All of the parameter files accessed by the Drawing Manager can be
deleted.
Manager
14.Plot Setup
Field Descriptions
I/Plot Number Displays the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to be
deleted (an alphanumeric value up to 24 characters).

I/Plot Description Displays the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumeric
File Specification Displays the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14

characters).
Path Name Displays the directory path location of the directory that contains the
parameter file (up to 36 characters).
Workstation/Server Name Displays the workstation node address that contains the
477
________________
Steps
1. Select the Delete option from the I/Plot Parameter File form.
The system displays a list of the existing parameter files.
2. Select I/Plot Parameter file for Deletion
Select the Parameter file to be deleted
Accept to Delete I/Plot Parameter Definition
Select Accept to delete.
OR
478
________________ Appendix A: Error Messages
Appendix A Error Messages

The PDS 3D products share common message files contained in the
win32app\ingr\pdshell\msg directory.
pdsmc.msg - command field messages
pdsme.msg - error and warning messages
pdsmp.msg - prompts and messages
pdsms.msg - status messages.
Messages
A. Error
479
________________
480
________________ Glossary
Glossary
absolute path name The sequence of directories, beginning with the root directory (/) that
locates a file. See also path name and relative path name.
active depth The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and perform
manipulations.
active process The process which is displayed in the Process ID field; it controls the
message fields, the menus, and the keyboard. The active process has a
highlighted window icon strip.
application software Software designed to meet specific needs, unlike system software which
runs other software.
batch processing A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into a
group (or batch) and executes the group in a continuous stream without
user intervention.
batch queue A queue, or channel for moving requests, created through NQS. A batch
queue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batch
options screen menu.
branch point A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can be
assigned different segment parameters. A branch point allows for
placement of branch components.
cancel button The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X or
the word cancel. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option.
Glossary
cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a
group, and then manipulated as individual elements.
character A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data.
client In network operations, a node which accesses data or performs a function on

the remote resource (usually a server). All network operations (database,
NFS, NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server
relationship.
column An attribute of a database table. A group of columns defines a table in a

database.
command Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data.
confirm button A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains a
green check mark or the word confirm. Select the confirm button to initiate
a specified option.
481
________________
coordinate The location of a point along the X, Y, or Z axis.
coordinate system A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the design
cube. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate
system, whereby points are located by traversing the X, Y, and Z axes of the
design cube. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin defined as
0,0,0, though this is not required. Other coordinate systems are used to more
easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. For example,
you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere,
and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on a
cylinder.
coordinates An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a
coordinate system.
core files The image files written by System V for a number of reasons, the most
common of which are memory violations, illegal instructions, bus errors,
and user-generated quit signals.
cursor The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area.
data button The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points, to accept
previously selected elements, and to select commands from forms and
menus.
data entry field The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. Also known as
key-in field.
data point A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. Data points select
commands from the panel menus and Menu Bar, place elements, identify
and accept elements, and activate windows and perform window
manipulations.
database A collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined

structure and organization that can then be communicated, interpreted, or
processed by a specific program.
database table The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and contains
information about the project and design elements.
default The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by

the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user.
delete To remove, destroy, eliminate, or erase.
delimiter A separating mark or space; a character or sequence of contiguous

characters that mark the end of a string of characters.
device A nonaddressable component of a network, that is, a component onto which

a user cannot log, for example, tape drive, disk drive, and floppy disk.
482
________________ Glossary
directory A file that contains the names of other files.
display-list box A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field.
When selected, a list of the data available for that field is displayed. Input
can then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in the
information.
domain The set of acceptable values for a value within a component.
dragging Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an element
so you can see it move.
easting A term used in plane surveying that describes an east, or positive, difference
in longitude.
entity An object (project, drawing, element, and so forth.) of interest about which
information is stored; a relational database table.
envelope file See interference envelope.
file specification A UNIX path name that tells the system where to locate a file.
filename A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. The name should
be relevant to the contents of the file.
form An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. Because
many of the screen menus in the application software are built with
I/FORMS, you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation.
full path name The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file, including the file
name. See also relative path name.
Glossary
gadget A portion of a form, such as a button, a field, or a checklist, that responds to
information. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas.
header The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. The
header contains information on the structure and contents of the file.
hierarchy A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents)

for grouping files or commands.
icon A pictorial representation or image; a symbol that graphically identifies a

command.
Informix A relational database management system supported by RIS.
Ingres A relational database management system supported by RIS.
interference envelope An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used in

conjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking.
Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology to
distinguish them from primitives.
483
________________
invert elevation The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe.
isometric Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at

right angles; a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at
an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the
base.
key An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle to

individual rows of the table.
key-in field The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. Also known as a
data entry field.
keypoint A point on an element, including vertices, to which you can snap.
keyword A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certain

function.
menubar The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selecting
commands.
message area The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you are
working in a design file. It is divided into the Command Status field, the
Current Command field, the Prompt field, and the Key-in field.
model A graphic representation or schema.
network An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them to

share data and control. The term network can mean the devices that connect
the system, or it can mean the connected system.
NFS Network File System, the system that provides access to data that is
distributed among machines through an interconnection of host computers
and workstations. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your local
workstation so you can access the data as though it were local. NFS is
usually used to access centralized data on a server.
node Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connected

to a network. The network enables the connected nodes to share data and
system control.
node address The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it is
manufactured. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicate
with another node in the network.
node name A name, or alias, that can be assigned to the node address of a device on a
network.
northing A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate
system.
484
________________ Glossary
nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection point
to piping. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance, but rather
represents the face-of-flange coordinate.
NQS Network Queuing System, the software package that allows you to define
network-wide batch and device queues. Use of NQS involves setting up
local resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside and
setting up pipe queues on the systems that are to have access to the
resources.
Oracle A relational database management system supported by RIS.
origin In coordinate geometry, the point where the x, y, and z-axes intersect.
origin point The point at which the coordinate system is placed.
orthogonal view A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which
are orthogonal to the plane.
parameter A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of

something.
path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to

a command.
path name The sequence of directories leading to a file. See also absolute path name
and relative path name.
PDS Plant Design System
pipe queue A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues on
remote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response.
Glossary
place data point To identify a specific element, or indicate a specific point in the design file.
plane A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary, but is
level, having no elevations or depressions, and is three-dimensional.
RDB Reference Database.
reference database A collection of reference data containing information relative to industry

design codes, vendors catalog data, job specifications, commodity libraries,
graphics symbology, label descriptions, report formats and other
information of a similar manner.
relative path name The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular
file. See also path name and absolute path name.
rotate To turn; to change the angular orientation; to transform by revolution about

a specific axis.
485
________________
row A unit of related information in a table. One collection of column values for
a table.
rubberbanding The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a data
point while the element changes as you move the cursor.
schema A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database.
schema file A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database.
server In network operations, the node which maintains common data or performs
a common task needed by clients. All network operations (database, NFS,
NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship.
Structured Query Language developed by IBM for creating, modifying, and querying
Language SQL relational databases.
style The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes, dash-dot, solid,

and so forth.
surface The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element.
symbology The display style of an element, including color, style, and weight.
table A collection of data for quick reference, either stored in sequential locations
in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the
same type.
toggle To switch; to change between two alternatives.
user name A name that provides access to an account on the system.
values Data, either entered by the user or determined by the software, that are
stored in an attribute.
variable A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values.
vector A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction, generally represented

as a line. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as
a coordinate triple (x,y,z).
view The defined area of vision on a screen. A view allows you to see a
prescribed volume of the design cube. Views are created with their own x,
y, and z axes. The x,y plane of the view is parallel to the screen, while the
z-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you.
The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation with
respect to the design cube. See also active depth.
virtual memory External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extension
of the computers internal memory. The software uses virtual memory to
store data. This means that unneeded files and data, stay on the disk until
they are called for. Because the internal processing memory stores a
minimal amount of data, the software can perform processing more quickly.
486
________________ Glossary
working directory The directory from which you are accessing files.
Glossary
487
________________
488
________________ Index
Index
A automatic (continued)
active labels (continued)
options 214 define search criteria 371
add label fence contents 370
drawing category 203 automatic title block generation 44
model category 281
align B
drawing view 284 borders 29
align view 205 bottom-to-top 195
alternate button assignments 223
cell libraries 37
drawing categories 35 C
alternate seed file 33 camera 196
analyze 220 lens 446
annotation 291 off 446
automatic labels 367 position 446
display report 328 setup 445
drawing target 446
annotation symbology 341 view 445
overlay 336 cascade 195
labels categories 35
centerlines 313 cells
update 377 and cell libraries 37
mass annotation center
options 296 window 198
name labels 344 cmds 193
options 347 code lists 41
overlay drawing 336 color 341
place cell 331 shading 442
place labels colors 221
options 302 compose
place text and line 333 drawing 261
revision markers 326 align drawing view 284
update labels 319, 377 delete drawing view 283
Approval form 184 revise
approve orientation 288
drawing 190 view data 286
Index
approving reports 184 unassigned views 290
attach view 263
model 124, 273 compose drawing
overlay drawing 336 reference models 267
attributes composing drawings 225
specifying 153 constant shading 443
automatic coordinate
attach and verify reference models 127 label 356
labels 367
489
________________
copy 196 define

active drawing 269 composite drawing
another drawing 271 with saved view 94
drawing 67 composite drawing with saved view 244
drawing view 251 search criteria
reference models for automatic labels 371
from active drawing 119 view location 83, 237
from another drawing 121 delete 130
copy drawing drawing 131
drawing view data 70 view 132, 283
copy view 205 InterPlot parameter file 477
create unassigned view 427
composite detach
view 239 models 126, 277
composite drawing dialog view rotation 207, 441
view dimensioning in whole millimeters 33, 41, 49
define views 242 discrimination
composite drawing view 88 data file 139
define views 92 display
from saved view 94 dimensions in whole millimeters 33, 41, 49
drawing 59 report 328
view 72, 226 drawing
define view location 237 annotation 291
named item 230 coordinate label 356
model 232 mass annotation command 293
project 234 name label 344
saved view 236 symbology 341
drawing view 72 bar menu
ASCII file 62 review attribute 338
define view location 83 select another drawing 219
from named item 76 borders 29
model 78 categories 35, 416
project 80 review/revise 202
from saved view 82 category 198, 201
InterPlot parameter file 473 add 203
options 57 remove 204
plan view 257 composition 225
section view 254 compose drawing 261
cross-section 443 compose drawing view 263
customization copy
automatic title block generation 44 drawing view 251
display dimensions in whole millimeters 49 copy drawing view 85
Drawing Manager 43 create
nominal pipe diameter value 48 composite view 239
using alternate cell libraries 37 drawing view 226
using alternate drawing categories 35 plan view 257
using alternate seed files 33 section view 254
copy 67
D create 59
database management 51
tables 38 manager 55
490
________________ Index
drawing (continued) G
overlay 336 graphics
plot size 31 symbology 433
pull-down menu 194 graphics environment 193
report 134 grid on/off 206
symbology 341
views H
delete unassigned view 427 help 223
graphic symbology 433 hidden line 443
named item 431
Project Planner 423 I
select in_object.dwg
model 430 mass annotation 294
update views 429 instrumentation
what is a drawing? 27 labels
drawing manager mass annotation 294
before using 25 introduction 21
create options 57 isometric
Drawing Manager view 436
customization 43
overview 23 L
theory of operation 26 label
drawing view category type 309
what is a drawing view? 28 fence contents 370
placement 302
E labels 41
edit text 325 equipment
element 193 centerlines 313
commands 220 mass annotation 293
eqp_object.dwg options 296
mass annotation 294 name labels 344
equipment 193 options 347
centerlines 313 place labels
labels options 302
mass annotation 294 update annotation 377
error update labels 319
messages 479 labels.<xxx>
exit 209, 213, 451, 453, 455 mass annotation 295
lens 446
F level
features 21 symbology
file 193 off 205, 449
Index
pull-down menu 209 on 205, 448

in Project Planner 453 levels 197
file design command 212, 454 line
filled hidden line 443 weight 341
fit 198 looking
fonts 221 east 436
forms north 436
left/right screen 450 south 436
west 436
491
________________
M overview
magnify 198 Drawing Manager 23
mass annotation 293
drawing types 295 P
equipment 294 permanent color shading 442
instrumentation 294 phong shading 444
labels 293 place
labels.<xxx> 295 cell 331
object types 294 text and line 333
options 296 place labels 302
reject label 298 options 302
reject labeling point 298 plan view 436
skip current label 298 planar element
window center to item 298 match 439
<xxx>_object.dwg file 294 plot
match drawing 412
planar element 439 drawing categories 416
match planar element 207 reference models 417
measure distance 339 manager 411
millimeters plot drawing 412
dimensions displayed in 33, 41, 49 setup
model manager 471
categories 278 plot command 210
category plot plan
add 281 drawing views 424
remove 282 pull-down menu 423
review/revise 280 viewing options 435
move plot size 31
down 205 Previous 195
left 205 project
right 205 planner 421
up 205 command menu 422
seed file 33
N setup 457
name label 344 Project Planner
name labels drawing views 423
options 347 viewing options 423
named project planner
item 230, 431 pull-down menus
model 232 file 453
project 234 plot plan 423
named item 76 view 452
model 78 project.ddl file 38
project 80 pull-down menu
Next 195 drawing 194
file 209
O file design 212, 454
open plot 210
close 195 viewing direction 207
overlay drawing 336 viewing more 205
492
________________ Index
R revise (continued)
redefine options 102
individual views 113 orientation 115, 288
reference text 324
models 117, 267, 417 view data 286
attach model 124, 273 revision markers 326
automatic attach verify 275 rotate
copy 3 points 440
another drawing 271 about view (x,y,z) 438
detach model 277 rotate view
reference models about x axis 207
automatic attach verify 127 about y axis 207
copy about z axis 207
active drawing 269 absolute 207
from another drawing 121 by 3 points 207
copy from active drawing 119 element 207
detach model 126 relative 207
reject label 298 rotation 197
remove
drawing category 204 S
model category 282 saved
render 196 view 82, 236
render options 442 search criteria
rendering 222 for automatic labels 371
report for VHL 401
drawing 134 Search Criteria - Piping Segment form 153
files 139 seed file
output 140 alternate 33
records 139 select
report data another drawing 219
discrimination data file 139 model 430
files and records 139 set
format file 139 active depth 208
report output 140 absolute 208
review relative 208
attribute 338 display depth 208
drawing category 202 absolute 208
review/revise relative 208
model category 280 drawing symbology 341
revise view orientation 436
composite settings 193
drawing view commands 221
Index
data 111 setup 25, 457

individual views 113 shading
drawing 104 color 442
drawing view 106 show
data 108 active depth 208
reference models 117 display depth 208
revise drawing view data 108 smooth shading 443
revise orientation 115 standard notes 41
InterPlot parameter file 475
493
________________
stereo 444 view 193

swap 195 commands 195
symbology depth 208
drawing 341 manipulations 447
on 205
T pull-down menu from Project Planner 452
tables rotation 207, 441
Database 38 toggle 205
text update 437
size 341 viewing
theory of operation 26 commands 198
tile 195 direction 207
title block hidden line graphics 388
automatic 44 more 205
typefaces 15 options 199
viewing options 198
U camera view 445
unassigned views 290 color shading 442
units dialog view rotation 207, 441
working form screen 450
whole millimeters (no decimal places) 33, 41, from plot plan pull-down menu 435
49 match planar element 439
update 195 Project Planner 423
all 205 rotate about view 438
annotation rotation 3 points 440
labels 377 set view orientation 436
labels 319, 377 update window 437
edit text 325 views 447
revise text 324
left 205 W
right 205 weight
view 205 display toggle 206
views 429 whole millimeters
window 437 dimensions displayed in 33, 41, 49
user window
commands 223 area 198
preferences 223 center 198
usr 193 update 437
wiremesh 442
V working units
vector whole millimeters (no decimal places) 33, 41, 49
hidden line manager
viewing hidden line graphics 388 Z
vector hidden line manager 379 zoom
before using 380 in 198
processing options out 198
post 380
pre 380
VHL 379
processing options 380
search criteria 401
494

Draw

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Draw

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)

This document replaces DEA503280.

RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

If You Need Assistance

Please have the following information available when you call:

Your name and telephone number.

The products name.

Your CPIN number and service number.

A brief description of the problem.

Intergraph General Information

All countries 1-256-730-2000

Customer Response Center (U.S. Only)

U.S. Customer Care Center 1-888-779-3824

Training Registration (U.S. Only)

Regional Sales Information (U.S. Only)

You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph.com.

Educational Media Contacts

Mail Intergraph Corporation

FAX PBS Documentation

Electronic Mail pds_doc@metron.b30.ingr.com

Educational Media Contacts .......................................................................................... 5

General Conventions .................................................................................................................... 15

Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... 16

1. Welcome to Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) ................................................................................. 19

Drawing Manager Introduction .................................................................................................... 21

2. Overview of Drawing Manager .................................................................................................... 23

2.1 Before Using Drawing Manager ......................................................................................... 25

2.2.1 Drawings ................................................................................................................. 27

2.2.12.1 Automatic Title Block Generation ....................................................... 44

3. Drawing Management .................................................................................................................. 51

3.1 Using the Drawing Management Commands ..................................................................... 53

4. Drawing Manager ......................................................................................................................... 55

4.1 Create Options ..................................................................................................................... 57

4.1.1 Create Drawing ....................................................................................................... 59

4.1.3.1 Drawing View Data .................................................................................. 70

4.1.4 Create Drawing View .............................................................................................. 72

4.1.4.1 Named Item .............................................................................................. 76

4.1.4.1.1 Named Item by Model ........................................................... 78

4.1.4.2 Saved View .............................................................................................. 82

4.2 Copy Drawing View ........................................................................................................... 85

4.3.1 Define Views for Composite Drawing View .......................................................... 92

4.3.1.1 Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View .............................. 94

4.3.2 Create Composite Drawing Views Example ........................................................... 95

4.4 Revise Options .................................................................................................................... 102

4.4.1 Revise Drawing ....................................................................................................... 104

4.4.2.1 Revise Drawing View Data ...................................................................... 108

4.4.2.2.1 Redefine Individual Views ..................................................... 113

4.4.2.3 Revise Orientation .................................................................................... 115

4.4.2.4.1 Copy From Active Drawing ................................................... 119

4.5 Delete Options ..................................................................................................................... 130

4.5.1 Delete Drawing ....................................................................................................... 131

4.6 Report - Drawing Management Data .................................................................................. 134

4.7.1 Using the Report Commands .................................................................................. 139

4.8 Report Format Form ............................................................................................................ 141

4.8.1 Format Creation/Revision Form ............................................................................. 143

4.9 Discrimination Data Form ................................................................................................... 147

4.9.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form ........................................................................ 149

4.9.2.1 Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form ................................................... 153

4.9.3 Discrimination Data Deletion Form ........................................................................ 162

4.10 Search Criteria Data Form ................................................................................................ 164

4.10.1 Search Criteria Data Creation Form .................................................................... 166

4.11 Report Form ...................................................................................................................... 173

4.11.1 Report Creation Form ......................................................................................... 175

4.11.4.1 Approval/Revision Interface Form .................................................... 184